HANDBOOK Access to the Handbook

The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website, in the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address: http://service.citroen.com/ddb/

From the appropriate Store, download the Scan Select: MyCitroën application for smartphone. - the language, - the vehicle, its body style, - the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of 1st registration of your vehicle. Then select: - the vehicle, - the print edition appropriate for the date of 1st registration of your vehicle. Access to the Handbook. Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.

This symbol indicates the latest information available. In this document, you will find all of the Welcome instructions and recommendations on use Key Thank you for choosing a Citroën that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to This key will enable you to identify the special C4 SpaceTourer. the fullest. It is strongly recommended that features of your vehicle: you familiarise yourself with it as well as the This document presents the information and C4 SpaceTourer Maintenance and Warranty Guide which will recommendations required for you to be able to provide you with information about warranties, explore your vehicle in complete safety. servicing and roadside assistance associated Grand C4 SpaceTourer Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of with your vehicle. the equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the Grand C4 SpaceTourer Key specification for the country in which it was 5-seat sold. Safety warning

The descriptions and illustrations are given as Additional information Grand C4 SpaceTourer indications only. 7-seat Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to Contributes to the protection of the modify the technical specifications, equipment environment and accessories without having to update this Left-hand drive vehicle edition of the guide.

If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, Right-hand drive vehicle please ensure this Handbook is passed on to the new owner. Location of the equipment/button described with a black zone Contents

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility Instruments and controls 4 Electronic key – Remote control 40 Lighting control stalk 90 Keyless Entry and Starting 41 Automatic headlamp dipping 94 Central locking 43 Headlamp adjustment 96 Back-up procedures 45 Cornering lighting 96 Doors 47 Directional lighting 97 Eco-driving . Boot 47 Wiper control stalk 98 Motorised tailgate 48 Automatic wiping 99 Hands-free tailgate 51 Screen wash 100 Alarm 53 Electric windows 55

Instruments Instrument panels 8 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Indicators 26 Touch screen 31 Trip computer 36 Ease of use and comfort Safety Setting the date and time 39 Front seats 57 General safety recommendations 101 Rear seats 62 Hazard warning lamps 101 Seat modular design and configuration 67 Horn 102 Steering wheel adjustment 68 Emergency or assistance call 102 Mirrors 68 Electronic stability control (ESC) 103 Ventilation 70 Seat belts 106 Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning 71 Airbags 109 Heating 72 Child seats 112 Dual-zone temperature-regulated manual air conditioning 72 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 113 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 74 ISOFIX mountings/child seats 119 Recirculation of interior air 76 Child lock 124 Front demist – defrost 77 Rear screen demist – defrost 77 Fragrance diffuser 77 Front fittings 79 Rear fittings 84 Boot fittings 85 Courtesy lamps 87 Interior ambient lighting 88 Footwell lighting 88 2 Panoramic glass sunroof 89 Contents .

Driving Practical information Technical data Driving advice 126 Compatibility of fuels 189 Engine technical data and towed loads 237 Starting/switching off the engine Fuel 190 Engines and towed loads – PETROL 238 using the electronic key 127 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 191 Engines and towed loads – DIESEL 240 Starting/switching off the engine Snow chains 191 Dimensions 243 with K​ eyless Entry and Starting 129 Towing device 192 Identification markings 244 Switching the ignition on (without starting) 131 Towing system with quickly detachable towball 193 Electric parking brake 131 Load reduction mode 195 Hill start assist 134 Energy economy mode 195 5-speed manual gearbox 135 Changing a wiper blade 195 6-speed manual gearbox 135 Roof bars 196 Automatic gearbox 136 Very cold climate screen(s) 197 Audio and telematics . Gear efficiency indicator 139 Bonnet 198 CITROËN Connect Radio Stop & Start 140 Engine compartment 199 CITROËN Connect Nav Tyre under-inflation detection 142 Checking levels 199 Memorising speeds 144 Checks 202 Speed Limit recognition and ® recommendation 144 AdBlue (BlueHDi engines) 204 Speed limiter 147 Alphabetical index Cruise control 148 . Adaptive cruise control 151 Adaptive cruise control until vehicle is stopped/until 19 mph (30 km/h) 157 Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Intelligent emergency braking assistance 165 Access to additional videos Lane Departure Warning System 169 Blind Spot Detection 173 In the event of a breakdown Fatigue detection system 175 Warning triangle 208 Parking sensors 176 Temporary puncture repair kit 208 Reversing camera 178 Spare wheel 211 Vision 360 179 Changing a bulb 220 Park Assist 181 Changing a fuse 226 12 V battery 231 bit.ly/helpPSA Towing 234 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 236

3 Overview

Instruments and controls 1 7 Door mirrors Touch screen Electric windows, deactivating Equipment configuration Date and time adjustment 2 Ventilation Bonnet release Heating Dual-zone manual air conditioning 3 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning Demisting/Defrosting Dashboard fuses 8 4 Electric parking brake Automatic gearbox 9 5 5/6-speed manual gearbox Courtesy lamps Rear view mirror Child-monitoring mirror Instruments and controls Panoramic glass sunroof (continued) Emergency or assistance call

6 Instrument panels Gear efficiency indicator Lighting dimmer Warning and indicator lamps Indicators - service indicator - engine oil level indicator - AdBlue® fluid range indicator

4 Overview .

6 9 Hazard warning lamps Audio and telematic system controls

1 Headlamp adjustment

2 Lighting control stalk 7 Direction indicators Memorising speeds Choice of instrument panel display Speed Limit recognition and mode (depending on version) recommendation Speed limiter 3 Cruise control Steering wheel adjustment Adaptive cruise control Horn Adaptive cruise control with Stop function

4 8 Wiper and screenwash control stalk Inter-vehicle distance Trip computer Black panel Choice of instrument panel display 5 mode (depending on version) START/STOP button

5 Eco-driving

Drive smoothly Switch off the demisting and defrosting Eco-driving controls when not required, if they are not Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, automatically controlled. that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel use engine braking rather than the Switch off the heated seat as soon as consumption and CO emissions. brake pedal, and press the accelerator possible. 2 progressively. These practices contribute Optimise the use of your towards a reduction in fuel consumption and Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps CO emissions and also help reduce the when the ambient light level does not require gearbox 2 background traffic noise. their use. With a manual gearbox, move off gently If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of Avoid running the engine before moving off, and change up without waiting. When the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up accelerating, change up early. when the traffic is flowing well. much faster while driving. With an automatic gearbox, give preference As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your to automatic mode and avoid pressing the Control the use of your electrical multimedia devices (film, music, video game accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. equipment etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of The gear efficiency indicator invites you to Before moving off, if the passenger fuel. engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the compartment is too warm, ventilate it by Disconnect your portable devices before indication is displayed in the instrument panel, opening the windows and air vents before leaving the vehicle. follow it straight away. using the air conditioning. For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows this indicator appears only in manual mode. and leave the air vents open. Consider using equipment that can help Limit the causes of excess keep the temperature in the passenger consumption compartment down (sunroof blind and window Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place blinds, etc.). the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has as close as possible to the rear seats. automatic regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

6 Eco-driving .

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a observe the schedule of operations in the roof box. manufacturer's service schedule. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and system is faulty, your vehicle becomes refit your summer tyres. polluting. Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to bring your vehicle's nitrogen oxide emissions Observe the recommendations back in line with the regulations. on maintenance When filling the tank, do not continue after the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow. referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side. At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only Carry out this check in particular: after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres) - before a long journey, that you will see the fuel consumption settle - at each change of season, down to a consistent average. - after a long period out of use. Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

7 Instruments Digital monochrome Control buttons 1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), ("Dials" mode). 2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position instrument panel A. Instrument panel and touch screen lighting and the gear with an automatic gearbox. dimmer buttons. Dials and display screens 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). B. Reminder of the service information. 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. Resetting of the selected function (service 5. Fuel gauge. indicator or trip distance recorder). 6. Total distance recorder (miles or km). Reminder of the remaining range with the 7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). SCR system and the AdBlue®. Alert log (current alerts). 8. Reminder of current media or telephone information. 9. Reminder of trip computer information. 1. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm), graduation 10. Exterior temperature (blue warning lamp depends on the engine (petrol or Diesel). comes on if there is a risk of ice). 2. Gear efficiency indicator, selector position 12-inch HD colour and the gear with an automatic gearbox. instrument panel 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). This instrument panel can be customised. 4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. Depending on the selected display mode, some Control button 5. Fuel gauge. information may be hidden. Reminder of the service information. 6. Service indicator, then total distance A. recorder (miles or km). Reminder of the remaining range with the ® These functions are displayed Dials and display screens SCR system and the AdBlue . successively on switching on the ignition. Resetting of the selected function (service indicator or trip distance recorder). 7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). 8. Reminder of heating and air conditioning settings.

8 Instruments Display areas Customisation of the 12-inch Choice of display mode colour instrument panel 1 You can modify the appearance of the instrument panel, by choosing: - a coloured ambience, - a display mode.

As a safety measure, these adjustments should be carried out with the vehicle stationary. Each mode corresponds to the type of information displayed in the configuration zone. F Turn the knob located to the left of the Choice of language steering wheel to display and scroll through It depends on the configuration of the touch the different modes on the right hand-side screen. of the instrument panel, Whatever the display mode or coloured Certain languages are not available for this F once the desired display mode appears, ambience selected, the instrument panel instrument panel, English is selected by default. press on the knob to validate. includes: - a fixed display area A with: • the speedometer, Choice of coloured ambience • the warning and indicator lamps, Perform changes when the vehicle is stationary: or • the fuel gauge, F • the various information reminders and Press this button in the warning messages, "Settings" menu of the touch - a configurable display area B. screen. Most warning and indicator lamps do not have The system restarts to take the modifications a fixed position. on the touch screen and instrument panel into The warning and indicator lamps are displayed account. from right to left in order of priority. For certain functions that have indicator lamps F Press the end of the lighting control stalk for both operation and for deactivation, there is to display and scroll through the different only one dedicated location. modes on the right hand-side of the instrument panel,

9 Instruments

F once the selected display mode appears, - "Driving": display of the rev counter and it is automatically applied after a few driving information (inter-vehicle time, etc.) moments with no action on the control stalk.

- "Personal": choice of information to be displayed in each of the 2 display zones (1/3 central and 1/3 right) among: • trip computer, - "Navigation": display of current navigation • media, information (map and instructions). • navigation, - "Dials": permanent display of the trip - "Minimal": no information displayed. • driving aids, computer and the rev counter. • rev counter, • engine coolant temperature gauge, • no information (blank).

Lighting dimmer Allows manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and touch screen according to the exterior brightness.

10 Instruments Only works when the vehicle lamps are on, F In the Settings menu, select "Brightness". Black panel (touch screen) except daytime running lamps. F Adjust the brightness by pressing the arrows or moving the slider. F In the Settings menu, select "Dark". The 1 screen goes off. Two buttons F Press the screen again (anywhere on its Black panel (comfortable surface) to switch it on again. night driving display) When driving at night, this function allows Warning and indicator certain instrument panel displays to be switched off so as to reduce visual fatigue for lamps the driver. Displayed as symbols, the warning and The essential driving information, such as the indicator lamps inform the driver of the vehicle speed, warning and indicator lamps, occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamps) or the cruise control or speed limiter, remains of the operating status of a system (operation displayed in the instrument panel. or deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps With the exterior lighting on, press button A to light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in increase the brightness of the instruments and Using the steering mounted several colours. controls and the ambience of the vehicle or control button B to reduce it. Associated warnings As soon as the lighting reaches the required level of brightness, release the button. The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message displayed in a screen. Touch screen Relating the type of alert to the operating status of the vehicle allows you to determine whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred: refer to the description of each lamp for further information.

F With the exterior lighting on, press this button to activate the black panel. F Press the button once again to deactivate it.

11 Instruments

When the ignition is switched on Certain red or orange warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. These warning lamps should go off as soon as the engine is started.

Persistent warning lamp When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of a red or orange warning lamp indicates a fault that needs further investigation, using any associated message and the description of the warning lamp in the documentation.

Where a warning lamp remains lit The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning and indicator lamp description indicate whether you should contact a qualified professional in addition to the immediate recommended actions.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition.

(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

12 Instruments List of warning and indicator lamps 1 Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Red warning/indicator lamps

STOP Fixed, associated Indicates a serious fault with the Carry out (1) and then (2). with another warning engine, braking system, power lamp, accompanied steering or a major electrical fault. by the display of a message and an audible signal.

Engine oil Fixed. There is a fault with the engine Carry out (1) and then (2). pressure lubrication system.

Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped Carry out (1), then top up with brake fluid that significantly. complies with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the problem persists, carry out (2).

Fixed. The electronic brake force Carry out (1) and then (2). distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. +

13 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Electric parking Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied. brake

Flashing. The electric parking brake is not Carry out (1): park on flat level ground (horizontally). applied automatically. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. The application/release is faulty. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P. Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).

Operating fault Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is not operating Make your vehicle safe: (with electric by the message at maximum efficiency and cannot F Park on a level surface. + parking brake) "Parking brake fault". ensure parking the vehicle in F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. complete safety in all situations. F With an automatic gearbox, with P selected, place the chocks supplied against one of the wheels. Then carry out (2). +

+

Maximum Fixed. The temperature of the cooling Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled coolant system is too high. down before topping up to the required level if temperature necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).

Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning lamp a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack does not go off when the engine is started, carry out (2). or cut alternator belt, etc.).

14 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Door open* Fixed, associated with A door, the boot, the tailgate or Close the access. a message identifying the tailgate screen is still open the access. (depending on version). An audible signal supplements the alert if the speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h).

Seat belt not Fixed or flashing, A seat belt has not been fastened or fastened/ accompanied by an has been unfastened. unfastened audible signal.

Orange warning/indicator lamps

Operating fault Fixed. The electric parking brake has Carry out (3) quickly. (with electric a fault. parking brake)

Fixed, accompanied You can no longer immobilise the If manual application and release are not working, the by the message vehicle with the engine running. electric parking brake control lever is faulty. "Parking brake fault". The automatic functions must be used at all times and + are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever. Carry out (2).

* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.

15 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Operating fault Fixed, accompanied The parking brake is faulty: manual When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle: (with electric by the message and automatic functions may not be F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately + parking brake) "Parking brake fault". working. 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. If this procedure does not work, make your vehicle safe: + F Park on a level surface. F If you have a manual gearbox, engage a gear. F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the supplied chocks against one of the wheels. Then carry out (2).

Deactivation of Fixed. The "automatic application" (on Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no the automatic switching off the engine) and longer possible. functions (with "automatic release" (on acceleration) The brake can be applied or released manually. electric parking functions are deactivated. brake) In the event of a fault, illumination of this warning lamp is accompanied by a message.

Automatic Fixed, accompanied The automatic application is not Use the electric parking brake control lever. application by the message available, the parking brake can only If automatic release is also not available, use manual (with electric "Parking brake fault". be used manually. release. + parking brake)

Anti-lock Braking Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking. System (ABS) a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out (3).

16 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Service Temporarily on, One or more minor faults have Identify the cause of the fault using the message accompanied by the been detected for which there is no displayed in the instrument panel. display of a message. specific warning lamp. You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for example an open door or the start of saturation of the particle filter. For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).

Fixed, accompanied One or more major faults have Identify the cause of the fault using the message by the display of been detected for which there is no displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3). a message. specific warning lamp.

Fixed, accompanied Automatic release of the electric Use manual release. by the message parking brake is unavailable. 'Parking brake fault'.

Service warning lamp The servicing interval has been Only with BlueHDi Diesel versions. fixed and service exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible. + spanner flashing then fixed.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

17 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

AdBlue® Fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue® as soon as possible, or carry out (3). (access via the on the ignition, between 1,500 and 375 miles boot) accompanied by an (2,400 and 600 km). audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

AdBlue® warning lamp The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid a breakdown, flashing and Service 375 miles (600 km). or carry out (3). + warning lamp fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

AdBlue® warning lamp The AdBlue® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry out (2). flashing and Service starting inhibition system required It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its warning lamp fixed, by legislation prevents starting of the tank. accompanied by an engine. audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented.

18 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

® ® 1 AdBlue On for around The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue . (access via the 30 seconds when between 1,500 and 500 miles fuel filler flap) starting the vehicle, (2,400 and 800 km). accompanied by a message indicating the remaining driving range.

Fixed, on switching on The remaining driving range is Top up the AdBlue® as soon as possible, or carry the ignition, accompanied between 500 and 62 miles (800 and out (3). by an audible signal and 100 km). a message indicating the remaining driving range.

Flashing, The driving range is less than You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid starting accompanied by an 62 miles (100 km). being prevented, or carry out (3). audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

Flashing, The AdBlue® tank is empty: the To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry out (2). accompanied by an starting prevention system required It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its audible signal and by legislation prevents starting of the tank. a message indicating engine. that starting is prevented.

19 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

SCR emissions Fixed on switching on the A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions control system ignition, associated with control system has been detected. return to normal levels. + (BlueHDi Diesel) the Service and engine diagnostic warning + lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

Flashing on switching Depending on the message Carry out (3) as soon as possible to avoid on the ignition, displayed, you can continue driving a breakdown. associated with the for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before Service and engine the engine starting prevention diagnostic warning system is triggered. lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.

Flashing on switching An engine immobiliser prevents To start the engine, carry out (2). on the ignition, the engine from restarting (over associated with the the authorised driving limit after Service and engine confirmation of a fault with the diagnostic warning emissions control system). lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

20 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Engine Flashing. The engine management system has There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed. diagnostic a fault. Carry out (2) without fail. system Fixed. The emissions control system has The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. a fault. Carry out (3) quickly.

Collision Risk Fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated, Alert/Active by the display of via the vehicle configuration menu. Safety Brake a message.

Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle ahead.

Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3). by a message and an audible signal.

Dynamic Flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is activated stability control if there is a loss of grip or trajectory. (DSC)/Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Emergency Fixed, accompanied Emergency braking does not have If automatic release is not available, use manual brake anomaly by the message full power. release. (with electric "Parking brake fault". + parking brake)

21 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied The pressure in one or more tyres is Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. by an audible signal too low. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the and a message. pressure.

Under-inflation Under-inflation The system is faulty: tyre pressures Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. warning lamp flashing are no longer monitored. As soon as possible, check the pressure of the tyres + then fixed and Service and carry out (3). warning lamp fixed.

Diesel engine Temporarily on. When switching on the ignition, if the Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. pre-heating weather conditions and the engine When the warning lamp goes off, starting is temperature make it necessary. immediate if you press and hold: - the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. - the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.

Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt Carry out (3). pretensioners is faulty.

Front passenger Fixed. The front passenger airbag is In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing" airbag (ON) activated. child seat on the front passenger seat – Risk of The control is in the "ON" position. serious injury!

(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do (2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified (3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified so and switch off the ignition. workshop. workshop.

22 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Passenger Flashing. The passenger airbag system is Carry out (3). airbag system defective.

Fixed. The front passenger airbag is You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless deactivated. there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp The control is in the "OFF" position. on).

Low fuel level Fixed, accompanied When it first comes on, there Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. by an audible signal remains approximately 6 litres of Never drive until completely empty, this could and a message. fuel in the tank (reserve). damage the emissions and injection systems.

Lane Departure Fixed. The system has been automatically Warning System deactivated or placed on standby.

Flashing. You are about to cross a broken The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory lane marking without operating the on the side of the lane marking detected. direction indicators.

Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Carry out (3). by the display of + a message and an audible signal.

Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied The Stop & Start system is The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop. by the display of deactivated. Reactivate the function via the touch screen a message. configuration menu.

23 Instruments

Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations

Foot on the Fixed. Omission or insufficient pressure on With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running, brake* the brake pedal. before releasing the parking brake, to move out of position P.

Foot on the Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START Fully depress the clutch pedal. clutch* mode is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Rear foglamp Fixed. The lamp is on.

Green warning/indicator lamps

Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start puts the engine into STOP mode.

Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable or START mode is automatically triggered.

Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.

Blind spot Fixed. The function has been activated. monitoring

* Only with digital monochrome instrument panel.

24 Instruments Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations 1 Left-hand Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on. direction signal. indicator

Right-hand Flashing with audible The direction indicators are on. direction indicator signal.

Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Dipped beam Fixed. The lamps are on. headlamps

Directional Flashing. The directional headlamps system Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified headlamps has a fault. workshop.

Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are on.

Automatic Fixed. Automatic windscreen wiping is wiping activated.

Automatic Fixed. The function has been activated in headlamp the touch screen (Driving menu). + dipping The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" position. or

Blue warning/indicator lamps

Main beam Fixed. The main beams are on. headlamps 25 Instruments

Indicators The distance indicated (in miles or Resetting the service indicator kilometres) is calculated according to the The service indicator must be reset after each Service indicator distance covered and the time elapsed service. since the last service. The service indicator is displayed in the If you have carried out the service on your The alert may be triggered close to a due instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle vehicle yourself: date. version: F switch off the ignition, - the distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due, or the distance travelled since it was due preceded by the sign "-". - an alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next service is due or how long it is overdue.

Warning/indicator Actions/ State Cause lamp Observations Service Lights up temporarily Between 620 and spanner when the ignition is 1,860 miles (1,000 and switched on. 3,000 km) remain before F press and hold the trip distance recorder the next service is due. reset button, Fixed, when the The service is due in Have your vehicle F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder ignition is switched on. less than 620 miles serviced very soon. display begins a countdown, (1,000 km). F release the button when "=0" is displayed; the spanner disappears. Service Flashing then fixed, The servicing interval Have your vehicle spanner when the ignition is has been exceeded. serviced as soon as flashing switched on. possible. If you have to disconnect the battery + (For BlueHDi Diesel following this operation, lock the vehicle versions, associated and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to with the Service be registered. warning lamp).

26 Instruments

You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do Retrieving the service The level read will only be correct if the so. information vehicle is on level ground and the engine Wait a few minutes before switching off the 1 has been off for more than 30 minutes. You can access the service information at any engine. time. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified F Press the trip distance recorder reset workshop. button. After driving for a few minutes, the temperature Oil level correct The service information is displayed for and pressure in the cooling system increase. a few seconds, then disappears. To top up the level:

F wait for the engine to cool, F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the Engine coolant temperature pressure to drop, Oil level incorrect gauge F when the pressure has dropped, remove the cap, (Only with the 12" colour instrument panel.) F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.

This is indicated by the display of the message "Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel Be aware of the risk of scalding when screen, accompanied by the Service warning topping up the coolant. Do not fill above lamp and an audible signal. the maximum level (indicated on the If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using reservoir). the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine. For more information on Checking levels, Engine oil level indicator refer to the corresponding section.

With the engine running, when the needle is: (Depending on version.) - in zone A, the temperature is correct, On versions fitted with an electric oil level - in zone B, the temperature is too high; indicator, the state of the engine oil level is Oil level indicator fault the maximum temperature and the displayed in the instrument panel for a few central STOP warning lamps come on, seconds, after the servicing information. accompanied by an audible signal and a warning message. 27 Instruments

This is signalled by the display of the message "Oil In the event of the risk of non- When driving, the message is displayed every level measurement invalid" in the instrument panel. starting related to a lack of 185 miles (300 km) until the level is topped up. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified AdBlue® The reserve level has been reached; it is workshop. recommended that you top up as soon as The engine starting prevention system possible. In the event of a fault with the electric required by regulations is activated indicator, the engine oil level is no longer automatically once the AdBlue® tank is monitored. empty. Remaining range less than 375 miles (600 km) If the system is faulty, you must check the engine oil level using the manual dipstick Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km) located under the bonnet. When switching on the ignition, there is no For more information on Checking levels, automatic display of range in the instrument When switching on the ignition, this warning refer to the corresponding section. panel. lamp flashes, accompanied by the permanent lighting of the Service warning lamp, an audible signal and the display of a message ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating the remaining range in miles or AdBlue® range indicators With the 12" colour instrument panel, pressing kilometres. this button temporarily displays the driving When driving, this message is displayed every These range indicators are present only on range. 30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been BlueHDi Diesel versions. topped up. Once the AdBlue® tank is on reserve or after With access via the boot It is essential to top up as soon as possible and detection of a fault with the SCR emissions before the tank is completely empty; otherwise control system, when the ignition is switched Remaining range between 1,500 and it will not be possible to restart the engine after on, an indicator displays an estimate of the 375 miles (2,400 and 600 km) the next stop. distance that can be covered, the range, before

engine starting is prevented. ® Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp indicating the remaining range expressed in flashes, and the Service warning lamp comes on, miles or kilometres. accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible". 28 Instruments

The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting Range between 500 and 62 miles (800 and 100 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® inhibition system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine. 1 When switching on the ignition, this warning When switching on the ignition, this warning To be able to restart the engine, it is lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible lamp flashes, accompanied by the display essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® signal (1 beep) and the display of a message of the message "Top up AdBlue: Starting to its tank. ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating the remaining range impossible". expressed in miles or kilometres. The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting For more information on AdBlue® When driving, the audible signal and the inhibition system required by legislation (BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, message display are triggered every 62 miles prevents starting of the engine. on topping up, refer to the corresponding (100 km) until the fluid is topped up. section. It is essential to top up as soon as possible and before the tank is completely empty; otherwise To be able to restart the engine, it is ® it will not be possible to restart the engine after essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue With access via the fuel filler flap the next stop. to its tank.

Range between 1,500 and 500 miles For more information on AdBlue® (2,400 and 800 km) Range less than 62 miles (100 km) (BlueHDi engines), and, in particular, on topping up, refer to the corresponding section. Each time the vehicle is started, this warning When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on for about 30 seconds, lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible accompanied by the display of a message signal (1 beep) and the display of a message ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x ("Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible in x miles") indicating the remaining range in miles miles") indicating the remaining range in miles or kilometres. or kilometres. The reserve level has been reached; it is When driving, the audible signal and the recommended that you top up as soon as message display are triggered every 6 miles possible. (10 km) until the AdBlue tank is topped up. These messages are accompanied by the It is essential to top up as soon as possible and recommendation to not top up with more than before the tank is completely empty; otherwise 10 litres of AdBlue. it will not be possible to restart the engine after the next stop. 29 Instruments

During the permitted driving phase In the event of a fault with the You have exceeded the authorised driving (between 685 and 0 miles (1,100 and 0 km)) SCR emissions control system limit: the starting prevention system does not allow the engine to be started.

A system that prevents engine starting is If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed activated automatically from 685 miles To be able to start the engine, you must call on (after 31 miles (50 km) covered with the (1,100 km) after confirmation of a fault with a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. permanent display of the message signalling the SCR emissions control system. a fault), these warning lamps come on and the Have the system checked by a CITROËN AdBlue warning lamp flashes, accompanied by dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as an audible signal and the display of a message Distance recorders possible. (e.g. "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in The total and trip distances are displayed for 185 miles") indicating the remaining range in thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, miles or kilometres. when the driver's door is opened and when the In the event of the detection of a fault While driving, the message is displayed every vehicle is locked or unlocked. 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the When travelling abroad, you may need These warning lamps come on, accompanied ignition. to change the unit of distance: the speed by an audible signal and the display of the You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified display must be expressed in the official message "Emissions fault". workshop as soon as possible. units of the country (km or miles). The The alert is triggered when driving when the Otherwise you will not be able to restart the vehicle. change of units is done via the screen fault is detected for the first time, then when configuration menu, with the vehicle switching on the ignition for subsequent Starting prevented stationary. journeys, while the fault persists.

If it is a temporary fault, the alert Each time the ignition is switched on, these disappears during the next journey, after warning lamps come on and the AdBlue self-diagnosis of the SCR system. warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented".

30 Instruments

Total distance recorder Do not use pointed objects on the touch Touch screen screen. The touch screen gives access to: Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. 1 - the heating/air conditioning controls, Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle screen. functions and systems, - audio system and telephone controls and Principles the display of associated information, and, depending on equipment, allows: Use the buttons on each side of the touch - the display of alert messages and the visual screen to access the menus, then use the parking sensors information, buttons that appear on the touch screen. - the permanent display of the time and the Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp 2 pages. It measures the total distance travelled by the appears when there is a risk of ice), To deactivate/activate a function, press OFF/ vehicle since its first registration. - access to the internet services and ON. navigation system controls and the display To modify a setting (lighting duration, etc.) or of associated information. find additional information, press the symbol for Trip recorder the function.

As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations that require close attention with the vehicle After a few moments with no action on stationary. the secondary page, the primary page is Some functions are not accessible when displayed automatically. driving. Use this button to confirm.

General operation Use this button to return to the It measures the distance travelled since it was Recommendations previous page. reset by the driver. F With the ignition on, press the button until Use is possible in all temperatures. zeros appear. 31 Instruments Menus Telephone. Access to Configuration. See the "Audio and telematics" section.

Applications. Enables the trip computer to be displayed with the digital monochrome instrument panel.

See the "Audio and telematics" section.

Driving. Allows the activation, deactivation and adjustment of settings for certain functions. The functions accessible from this menu are arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings" and "Driving functions". Volume control/mute. See the "Audio and telematics" Air conditioning. section. Allows adjustment of the various settings for temperature, air flow, etc. Upper bar For more information on Heating, Manual Certain information is always present in the air conditioning and Automatic air upper bar of the touch screen: conditioning, refer to the corresponding - Summary of air conditioning information and sections. access to the simplified menu (temperature and air flow adjustment only). Connected navigation. - Summary of information from the Radio See the "Audio and telematics" section. Media, Telephone menus and navigation Radio Media. instructions*. See the "Audio and telematics" section. - Notifications zone (texts and email)*.

* Depending on equipment 32 Instruments Driving menu Vehicle settings tab 1 The functions are grouped into 4 families.

Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav

Driving lighting - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the automatic guide-me-home lighting. cornering lighting/directional headlamps. - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior - "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps) welcome lighting. depending on country of sale. - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of the cornering lighting/directional headlamps. - "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps) depending on country of sale.

Vehicle access - "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of - "Unlock driver's door only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the driver's door. selective unlocking of the driver's door. - "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking - "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of unlocking at the tailgate. at the tailgate. - "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of - "Motorised tailgate": activation/deactivation of motorised operation of the tailgate. motorised operation of the tailgate. - "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation - "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation of the hands-free tailgate function. of the hands-free tailgate function.

33 Instruments

Families Functions with CITROËN Connect Radio Functions with CITROËN Connect Nav

Comfort - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper on with reverse gear. rear wiper on with reverse gear. - "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of ambient lighting. automatic guide-me-home lighting. - "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse welcome lighting. gear. - "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of the interior ambient lighting. - "Mirror adaptation in reverse": activation/deactivation of the automatic mirror tilt when engaging reverse gear.

Security - "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the - "Collision risk alert": activation/deactivation of the collision risk alert. collision risk alert. - "Recommended speed display": activation/ - "Recommended speed display": activation/ deactivation of speed limit recognition. deactivation of speed limit recognition. - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system. the driver fatigue detection system.

For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.

34 Instruments Driving functions tab 1 Function Comment

Adjusting Speeds Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter, cruise control and adaptive cruise control.

​Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.

Diagnostic List of current alerts.

Lane assist Activation/deactivation of the "active lane departure warning" system.

Parking sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.

Automatic headlamp dipping Activation/deactivation of the "automatic headlamp dipping" function.

Stop & Start Activation/deactivation of the function.

Blind spot sensors Activation/deactivation of the function.

Panoramic visual aid Activation/deactivation of the function and then choice of options.

Active cruise control Choice of the standard cruise control or adaptive cruise control function.

Traction control Activation/deactivation of the function.

For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.

35 Instruments

Configuration Button Comments Digital monochrome The functions available through the instrument panel upper menu bar are detailed in the Adjustment of the display The data is accessible in the table below. Certain settings can be parameters (text scrolling, "Driving" menu. accessed on the second page. animations, etc.) and brightness.

Choose an ambience for the 12- inch colour instrument panel. Button Comments

Switch off the screen. Choice of the type of information displayed in the 12- inch colour instrument panel. Brightness adjustment. Choice of units: - temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) Choice and configuration of - distances and fuel consumption three personalised profiles and (l/100 km, mpg or km/l). a common profile. Choice of language for the Touch screen and instrument touch screen and 12-inch colour panel settings, etc. instrument panel. Permanent display: F Select the "Applications" menu, then "Trip Setting the date and time. computer". Activation and adjustment of the Wi-Fi settings. The information of the trip computer is displayed in tabs. F Press one of the buttons to display the Trip computer desired tab. System that gives you information on the current journey (range, current fuel consumption, average fuel consumption, etc.). 36 Instruments Temporary display in a specific window: Trip reset 12" colour instrument panel F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for access to the information and to display the Display of data on the instrument 1 different tabs. panel

The current information tab with: Trip computer data is displayed permanently - Range. when you select the "Dials" or "Personal" - Current fuel consumption. display mode. - Stop & Start time counter.

The trip "1" tab with: - Average speed for the first trip. - Average fuel consumption. - Distance travelled.

The trip "2" tab with: - Average speed for the second trip. - Average fuel consumption. - Distance travelled. F When the desired trip is displayed, press In all other display modes, pressing the end of the reset button or on the end of the wiper the wiper control stalk will cause this data to control stalk. appear temporarily in a specific window. Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used identically. F Press the button on the end of the wiper For example, trip 1 can be used for daily control stalk to display the various tabs in calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations. succession.

37 Instruments

Resetting the trip recorder This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the terrain, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption.

When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 miles (100 km).

If dashes are displayed continuously F When the desired trip is displayed, press while driving in place of the digits, contact the button at the end of the wiper control a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. stalk for more than two seconds. Trips 1 and 2 are independent and are used - The current information tab with: identically. Current fuel consumption • range, For example, trip 1 can be used for daily • current fuel consumption, calculations, and trip 2 for monthly calculations. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) • Stop & Start time counter. Calculated during the last few seconds. - Trip 1 with: • the average speed, A few definitions • the average fuel consumption, Range This function is only displayed from • the distance travelled, 19 mph (30 km/h). for the first trip. (miles or km) - Trip 2 with: The distance which can still be • the average speed, travelled with the fuel remaining in Average fuel consumption the tank (related to the average fuel • the average fuel consumption, (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) consumption over the last few miles • the distance travelled, Calculated since the last time the (kilometres) travelled). for the second trip. trip was reset.

38 Instruments

Average speed F Select "Date" or "Time". Additional adjustments F Choose the display formats. (mph or km/h) F Change the date and/or time using the You can choose: 1 Calculated since the last time the numeric keypad. - To change the display format of the date trip was reset. and time (12h/24h). F Press this button to confirm. - To change the time zone. - To activate or deactivate synchronisation Distance travelled with the GPS (UTC). (miles or km) Calculated since the last time the With CITROËN Connect Nav The system does not automatically trip was reset. manage the change between winter and Adjustment of the time and date is only summer time (depending on country). Stop & Start time counter available if synchronisation with GPS is The change between winter and summer (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) deactivated. time is done by changing the time zone.

F Select the Settings menu. A time counter calculates the total of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero every time the ignition is F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the switched on. secondary page.

F Select "Setting the time-date". Setting the date and time With CITROËN Connect Radio F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab. F Adjust the date and/or time using the F Select the Settings menu. numeric keypad. F Press this button to confirm.

F Select "System configuration". F Press this button to confirm.

F Select "Date and time".

39 Access

Electronic key – Remote Complete unlocking The direction indicators flash for control F Press the button. a few seconds. The spotlamps in the door mirrors come on. Depending on System that enables the activation of the version, the door mirrors unfold, the unlocking and locking of the vehicle, the Selective unlocking welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is opening of the boot and, depending on the It is set via the Driving menu. deactivated. version, the alarm from a distance. It also locates and starts the vehicle, as well as Complete unlocking is activated by default. protecting against theft. Locking the vehicle F To unlock the driver's door only, press the unlocking button once. F To unlock the other doors and the boot, press the button again. Normal locking F Press the button. Unlocking the vehicle and Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be opening the boot raised to the desired position. F Press and hold this button A. Unlocking the vehicle. Ensure that nothing could prevent the to unlock the vehicle and, correct operation of the windows. B. Central locking system of the vehicle. depending on version, release Be aware of children when operating the C. Locking the vehicle, and depending on the the tailgate or open the windows. version, releasing the tailgate or opening motorised tailgate. the motorised tailgate. The setting for the motorised tailgate The electronic key includes an integral back-up is in the Driving menu. The direction indicators come on for a few key. seconds. By default, motorised operation is activated. Depending on your version, the door mirrors fold, the alarm is activated. Unlocking the vehicle

40 Access

F Within five seconds, press the button again This system allows the unlocking, locking If one of the openings (doors or boot) is to deadlock the vehicle. and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the still open, the locking does not take place. electronic key in the recognition zone "A". However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully activated after about 45 seconds. If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and Locating your vehicle with no action on the doors or boot, the The electronic key is also used as 2 This function allows you to identify your vehicle vehicle will lock itself again automatically a remote control. For more information from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your after about 30 seconds. on the Remote Control, refer to the vehicle must be locked. If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also corresponding section. be reactivated automatically. F Press this button. For reasons of safety and theft protection, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it. The direction indicators will flash for around The automatic folding and unfolding It is recommended that you keep it on your 10 seconds and the courtesy lamps will switch on. of the door mirrors can be deactivated person. by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Keyless Entry and Unlocking the vehicle Deadlocking Starting

Deadlocking deactivates the interior door controls and it also deactivates the manual central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked. Complete unlocking F With the electronic key on your person and in recognition zone A, pass your hand behind F With the vehicle unlocked, press the locking the door handle of one of the front doors button. to unlock the vehicle or press the tailgate opening control (situated in the centre).

41 Access Selective unlocking Locking the vehicle Deadlocking Activation or deactivation of selective Deadlocking deactivates the interior door locking of the tailgate is done in the Normal locking controls and it also deactivates the manual Driving menu. central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the Complete unlocking is activated by default. vehicle when it is deadlocked. F To unlock only the driver's door, with the electronic key on your person, pass your hand behind the driver's door handle. F With the key in recognition zone A, press F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your on one of the front door handles (at the hand behind the front passenger door markings) to lock the vehicle or on the handle with the electronic key close to locking control located on the tailgate (on the passenger door, or press the tailgate the right) for versions that are not equipped opening control with the electronic key close with the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" to the rear of the vehicle. function. Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be By the doors or tailgate: raised to the desired position. F With the electronic key in recognition zone It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the A, press the door handle of one of the keys is left inside the vehicle. front doors (at the markings), or the locking control located on the tailgate (on the right) The direction indicators flash for a few for versions that are not equipped with the seconds. Ensure that nothing could prevent the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function, to Depending on your version, the door proper closure of the windows. lock the vehicle. mirrors fold, the alarm is deactivated and Be aware of children when operating the F Within 5 seconds, press the door handle the welcome lighting comes on. windows. again, or the locking control on the tailgate (on the right) for versions that are not The direction indicators come on for a few equipped with the "Hands-Free Tailgate seconds. Access" function, to deadlock the vehicle. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold and the alarm is activated.

42 Access

If one of the doors or the boot is still open As a safety measure (children on board), Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, or if the electronic key for the ​Keyless never leave the vehicle without taking the etc.) on the inner surface of the door Entry and Starting system has been left electronic key for the K​ eyless Entry and handle may affect detection. inside the vehicle, the central locking does Starting system with you, even for a short If cleaning the inner surface of the door not take place. period. handle using a cloth does not restore However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully Be aware of the risk of theft when the detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or 2 activated after about 45 seconds. electronic key for the ​Keyless Entry and a qualified workshop. Starting system is in one of the defined A sudden splash of water (stream of water, zones with the vehicle unlocked. high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be identified by the system as the desire to If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and open the vehicle. no action is taken at the doors or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock itself again In order to preserve the battery in the after about 30 seconds. electronic key and the vehicle's battery, If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also the "hands-free" functions are put into be reactivated automatically. long-term standby after 21 days without Central locking use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start Manual the engine with the electronic key in the The automatic folding and unfolding reader. of the door mirrors can be deactivated For more information on starting with ​ by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the workshop. corresponding section.

F Press this button to operate the central locking of the vehicle (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. F Pressing the button again unlocks the vehicle completely. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. 43 Access

The indicator lamp also goes off when Transporting long or voluminous Advice unlocking one or more doors. objects Press the central locking control to Remote control drive with the boot open and the doors The high frequency remote control is The central locking does not work if one of unlocked. a sensitive system; do not operate it while the doors is open. it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it. If the vehicle is locked from the outside or Do not press the buttons of your remote deadlocked, this button does not work. To control out of range and out of sight of unlock the vehicle from the inside: your vehicle. The remote control may stop F After normal locking, pull one of the working and would have to be reinitialised. interior door controls. The remote control cannot operate when F After deadlocking, use the remote the key is in the reader, even when the control, the Keyless Entry and Starting ignition is switched on. system or the integral key. Electrical interference The ​Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong magnetic fields, etc. Anti-theft protection Automatic (anti-intrusion Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this security) could cause malfunctions. The doors and boot lock automatically when Do not forget to turn the steering wheel to driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). engage the steering lock. To deactivate or reactivate this function (activated by default): F Press the button until a message appears in the instrument panel.

44 Access

Locking the vehicle Back-up opening/closing Driving with the doors locked may render with the integral key access by the emergency services to the interior difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution (with children on F Insert the key in the door lock. board), take the electronic key with you when F 2 Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle you leave the vehicle, even for a short time. to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it. F Turn the key rearwards again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. Purchasing a second-hand vehicle Flashing of the direction indicators for a few Have the key codes memorised by seconds confirms that the procedure has a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the The integral key is used to lock and unlock completed correctly. keys in your possession are the only ones the vehicle when there is a malfunction of which can start the vehicle. the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system caused in particular by: - key battery flat, vehicle battery discharged or disconnected, etc. If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this Back-up procedures - vehicle located in an area with strong function will not be activated when locking electromagnetic signals. with the key. F To extract the back-up key, pull and hold If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds Lost keys, remote control, button 1 while extracting key 2. electronic key on opening the door; switch on the ignition The integral key also enables: to stop it. - deactivation/reactivation of the front Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's passenger airbag, registration certificate, your personal - back-up locking of the passenger doors, identification documents and if possible, the - locking of the vehicle without the alarm label bearing the key code. Central locking not being activated. The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the functioning key code and the transponder code required to Use these procedures in the following cases: order a new key. - central locking fault, - battery disconnected or discharged.

45 Access

In the event of a malfunction with the Passenger doors Remote control problem – central locking system, the battery must reinitialisation be disconnected to lock the boot and thus ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.

Driver's door F Insert the key in the door lock. F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.

If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, activated/deactivated when the vehicle is replacement of the remote control battery or locked/unlocked. F Open the doors. in the event of a remote control malfunction, Opening a door will trigger the alarm, F For the rear doors, check that the child lock you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your which can be stopped by switching the is not on. vehicle. ignition on. F Insert the key into the latch on the edge of F Place the mechanical key (integral with the the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to remote control) in the lock to unlock your the right, for the right-hand side, and to the vehicle. left, for the left-hand side. The locking is F Place the electronic key in the reader. effective when the slot is horizontal. F Switch on the ignition by pressing "START/ F Close the doors and check from the outside STOP". that the vehicle is locked. The electronic key is fully operational again. If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

46 Access Changing the battery Doors Boot Opening Opening the tailgate From outside Using the electronic key/remote control F After unlocking the vehicle or with the 2 electronic key of the ​Keyless Entry and F Press and hold this button to Starting system in the recognition zone, pull release the tailgate. If the vehicle the door handle. was locked, this action unlocks the vehicle beforehand. From inside F Raise the tailgate. F Pull the interior opening control of a front Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts. door; this unlocks the vehicle completely. Battery replacement is signalled by the display When selective unlocking is activated, the of a message. electronic key must be close to the rear of F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver the vehicle. at the cutout. Closing F Remove the cover. When a door is not closed correctly: F Remove the discharged battery from its - engine running, this warning housing. lamp and a message appear With the tailgate opening control F Place the new battery into its location in the instrument panel (digital observing the original direction. monochrome) for a few seconds, F Clip the cover onto the casing. - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning Do not throw the remote control lamp and a message appear batteries away, they contain metals in the instrument panel (digital which are harmful to the environment. monochrome and 12 inch colour) Take them to an approved collection for a few seconds, accompanied point. by an audible signal.

47 Access

F With the vehicle unlocked or with the The motorised tailgate must only be operated In the event of a fault or difficulties felt in electronic key of the "​Keyless Entry and with the vehicle stationary. manoeuvring the tailgate when opening Starting" system in the coverage zone, Check that there is enough space to allow for or closing it, have it quickly checked press control A on the tailgate. the movement of the motorised tailgate. by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified F Raise the tailgate. workshop to stop this issue getting worse and so as to not cause the tailgate to drop, and serious injuries. The tailgate is not designed to support a bicycle carrier.

Closing the tailgate Motorised tailgate F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. General points F Release the grips and press down on the The motorised operation of the tailgate can outside of the tailgate to close it. be activated or deactivated by selecting If the tailgate is not properly closed: "Motorised tailgate" in the Driving menu of Never introduce a finger in the locking the touch screen. system of the motorised tailgate – Risk of - engine running, this warning a serious injury! lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel (digital monochrome) for a few seconds, Safety anti-pinch - vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning The motorised tailgate has an obstacle lamp and a message appear detection system that automatically interrupts in the instrument panel (digital and reverses its movement by a few degrees to monochrome and 12 inch colour) allow the obstacle to be cleared. for a few seconds, accompanied Please note that this anti-pinch system is not by an audible signal. active at the end of the closing travel (around 1 cm from completely closed).

48 Access

To avoid the risk of injury through pinching Motorised opening or trapping, before and during operation of the motorised tailgate: Tailgate opening using the - ensure that there is no person close to electronic key/remote control (A) the rear of the vehicle, F Hold the remote control button - monitor the activity of your rear 2 down for several seconds. passengers, particularly any children.

or

Tailgate opening using the Bicycle carrier/Towing device "Keyless Entry and Starting" The motorised tailgate is not designed to system (B) support a bicycle carrier. F Press control B on the tailgate with the When installing a bicycle carrier on a towing electronic key within the coverage zone. device with connection of a cable to the towing socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate - using the electronic key of the ​Keyless Entry will be automatically deactivated. and Starting system (A), When selective locking is activated, the If using a towing device or bicycle carrier - using the exterior tailgate control (B), electronic key must be close to the rear of not approved by CITROËN, it is essential - using the interior tailgate control (C), the vehicle. to deactivate the motorised operation of the - with a kicking movement, if your vehicle has tailgate. the hands-free function. For more information on the Hands-free Opening the tailgate tailgate, refer to the corresponding section. Operation F After the vehicle is fully unlocked, press There are several ways of operating the control B on the tailgate. motorised tailgate: The command is confirmed by an audible beep.

By default, the tailgate opens fully or to the stored position.

49 Access

To cancel the memorised position: Motorised closing Repeated opening and closing of the - stop the tailgate in an intermediate position, motorised tailgate can cause overheating There are two options: - press button C or the exterior control B for of its electric motor, after which opening F Press and release the exterior control B. more than 3 seconds. and closing will not be possible. or Cancellation of the memorised position is Allow the motor to cool down for ten confirmed by an audible signal. minutes before operating the tailgate F Press button C and release it. again. If you are unable to wait, operate it Manual operation manually. The motorised tailgate can be opened and closed manually, even if motorised operation is The motorised tailgate has a safety anti- Detection of obstacles activated. pinch feature which interrupts the closing However, any manual operation must be done If an obstacle (person or object) is movement if there is something in the way. with the tailgate first stopped. encountered, the anti-pinch system stops the During manual operations to open or close closing movement and raises the tailgate by the motorised tailgate, you will no longer be a few centimetres to clear the obstacle. At any point, it is possible to interrupt the assisted by the struts. Resistance to opening operation of the tailgate: and closing is therefore entirely normal. - by pressing one of these Memorising an opening two buttons, position or Reinitialising the motorised - by pressing the exterior Where height is restricted (garage with a low control B. tailgate ceiling, etc.) it is possible to limit the opening angle of the motorised tailgate. This operation is necessary where there is no After a movement is interrupted, pressing This memorisation is done as follows: movement – after detection of an obstacle, one of the controls again restarts the - open the tailgate to the desired position, reconnecting or recharging the battery, etc. F movement, unless you press the remote - press button C or the exterior control B for Open the tailgate manually, if necessary. F control button, which only controls more than 3 seconds. Fully close the tailgate manually. opening. Memorisation of the maximum opening position If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. dealer or qualified workshop.

50 Access Precautions in use Unlocking "Hands-free" opening

In wintry conditions In the event of an accumulation of snow on the tailgate, clear the snow before commanding a motorised opening of the 2 tailgate. The formation of ice can block the tailgate and prevent its opening: wait until the ice melts with the heating of the passenger compartment. F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot. F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the When washing lock to unlock the boot. F If your hands are full, with the remote When washing the vehicle in an automatic F Move the latch to the left. control on you in the recognition zone A, car wash, lock your vehicle to avoid the make a kicking movement with your foot risk of unexpected opening. below the rear bumper. Locking after closing Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and a beeping sound confirm the request. If the fault persists after closing again, the boot The tailgate opens to the stored position. will remain locked. Back-up control To manually unlock the boot in the event of a battery or central locking failure. Hands-free tailgate Making another kicking movement with your To enable you to open or close the tailgate foot below the bumper while the tailgate is while your hands are full, the motorised tailgate opening interrupts the movement. A third kicking may be fitted with the hands-free function. movement reverses the direction of movement. For more information on the Motorised tailgate, refer to the corresponding section. If the vehicle is locked, it unlocks before the tailgate opens.

51 Access

- you are washing your vehicle, Ensure that you are steady on your feet Automatic locking - your vehicle is being serviced, before making the kicking movement To lock the vehicle when the tailgate closes - you are accessing the spare wheel below the rear bumper. using a kicking movement, activate "Hands- (depending on version). Take care not to touch the exhaust free tailgate access self-locking" in the To avoid such operating problems, keep the system, which may be hot – Risk of burns! Driving menu of the touch screen. electronic key away from the recognition zone or deactivate the Hands-Free Tailgate Access Recommendations related function. "Hands-free" closing to the Hands-Free Tailgate After installing a towing device, it is F If your hands are full, with the remote Access function essential to contact a CITROËN dealer control on you in the recognition zone A, If several kicking movements to operate the or a qualified workshop so that it is taken make a kicking movement with your foot tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds into account by the detection system. below the rear bumper. before trying again. Otherwise, there is a risk of malfunction of Flashing of the direction indicator lamps and If it does not work, check that the electronic key the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function. a beeping sound confirm the request. is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic interference (e.g. smartphone). Making another kicking movement with your The function may be deactivated or affected if Ensure that no object or person might foot below the bumper while the tailgate is there is rain or snow. prevent the correct opening or closing of closing interrupts the movement. A third kicking The function may not work correctly with the tailgate. movement reverses the direction of movement. a prosthetic leg. Be particularly aware of children when operating the tailgate. In some circumstances, the tailgate may open Deactivation or close by itself, particularly if: - you hitch or unhitch a trailer, By default, hands-free access is activated. - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier, This function can be activated or deactivated - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle by selecting "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" in carrier, the Driving menu of the touch screen. - you place or lift something behind the vehicle, - an animal approaches the rear bumper,

52 Access

Alarm For all work on the alarm system, Deactivation contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified F Press one of the remote control unlocking workshop. buttons. Short press Locking the vehicle with full 2 alarm system Long press Activation

System which protects and provides a deterrent F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. against theft and break-ins. It provides the F Lock the vehicle using the or following types of monitoring: remote control. F Unlock the vehicle with the "​Keyless Entry - Exterior perimeter: and Starting" system. The system checks whether the vehicle is The monitoring system is deactivated: the opened. The alarm is triggered if anyone or indicator lamp for the button goes off and the tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet. F Lock the vehicle using the "​Keyless Entry direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. - Interior volumetric: and Starting" system. The system checks for any variation in the The monitoring system is active: the indicator volume in the passenger compartment. lamp for the button flashes once per second The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks When the vehicle automatically locks itself and the direction indicators come on for about a window, enters the passenger again (as happens if a door or boot is not 2 seconds. compartment or moves inside the vehicle. opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), After an instruction to lock the vehicle using the monitoring system is automatically the remote control or the "​Keyless Entry reactivated. and Starting" system, the exterior perimeter Self-protection function: the system monitoring is activated after 5 seconds, the checks for the putting out of service of its interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds. Locking the vehicle own components. The alarm is triggered if the siren's battery, button or wiring is If an opening (door, boot, bonnet, etc.) is with exterior perimeter disconnected or damaged. incorrectly closed, the vehicle is not locked monitoring only but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring activated after 45 seconds at the same time as to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in the interior volumetric monitoring. certain cases such as: - leaving a pet in the vehicle, 53 Access - leaving a window partially open, The indicator lamp for the button goes off. Locking the vehicle without - washing your vehicle, F Reactivate the full alarm system by locking - changing a wheel, the vehicle using the remote control or the activating the alarm - having your vehicle towed, "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key - transport by ship. The indicator lamp for the button flashes once (integral to the remote control) in the driver's per second again. door lock. Deactivating the interior volumetric monitoring Triggering of the alarm Operating fault F Switch off the ignition and within ten This results in sounding the siren and flashing When the ignition is switched on, fixed seconds, press the alarm button until the the direction indicators for thirty seconds. illumination of the indicator lamp for the button indicator lamp is on continuously. The monitoring functions remain active until indicates a fault with the system. F Get out of the vehicle. the alarm has been triggered eleven times in Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or F Immediately lock the vehicle using the succession. a qualified workshop. remote control or the "Keyless Entry and When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote Starting" system. control or the "​Keyless Entry and Starting" The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp Automatic activation activated: the indicator lamp for the button for the button informs you that the alarm was (Depending on the country where the product flashes once per second. triggered during your absence. When the is sold.) To take effect, this deactivation must be carried ignition is switched on, this flashing stops out each time the ignition is switched off. immediately. The system is activated automatically 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed. Reactivating the interior F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering volumetric monitoring Failure of the remote the vehicle, first press the unlocking button control on the remote control or unlock the vehicle F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring using the "​Keyless Entry and Starting" by unlocking the vehicle using the remote To deactivate the monitoring functions: system. control or the "​Keyless Entry and Starting" F Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to system. the remote control) in the driver's door lock, F Open the door; this sets off the alarm. F Upon switching on the ignition the alarm stops. The indicator lamp for the button goes off.

54 Access

The electric window switches remain The indicator lamp in the button comes on, Electric windows operational for approximately 45 seconds after accompanied by a message confirming switching off the ignition. activation. It remains on, as long as the Once this time has elapsed, the electric deactivation is in place. windows will not operate. To reactivate them, Use of the rear electric windows from the switch the ignition on again. driver's controls remains possible. 2 Safety anti-pinch Reinitialisation of the 1. Left-hand front. When the window rises and meets an obstacle, electric windows 2. Right-hand front. it stops and immediately partially lowers again. Following reconnection of the battery, the anti- 3. Right-hand rear. In the event of unwanted opening of the pinch safety function must be reinitialised. 4. Left-hand rear. window on closing, press the switch until the The anti-pinch safety function is not active 5. Deactivate the electric window switches window opens completely, then pull the switch during these operations: located at the rear seats. immediately until the window closes. Continue For each window: to hold the switch for approximately one second - Lower the window fully, then raise it, it will after the window has closed. rise in steps of a few centimetres each time The anti-pinch safety function is not active the control is pressed. Repeat the operation Manual operation during this system activation operation. until the window closes completely, To open or close the window, press or pull the - Continue to pull the switch for at least one switch gently. The window stops as soon as the second after reaching the window closed control is released. position.

Automatic operation Deactivating the rear controls for the rear To open or close the window, press or pull windows switch fully: the window opens or closes completely when the switch is released. For the safety of your children, press Pressing the switch again stops the movement switch 5 to prevent operation of the of the window. rear windows irrespective of their positions.

55 Access

In the event of contact (pinching) during operation of the windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the switch concerned. When operating the passenger electric window switches, the driver must ensure that nothing is preventing correct closing of the windows. The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows. Be aware of passengers or other persons present when closing the windows using the electronic key or the "​Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

56 Ease of use and comfort

Front seats Before moving the seat backwards, Seat cushion height ensure that there is nothing that might Correct driving position prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats For safety reasons, seat adjustments or jamming the seat if large objects are must only be made when the vehicle is placed on the floor behind the seat. stationary. 3 Before taking to the road and to make the most of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and controls, Manual adjustments F carry out these adjustments in the following order: Longitudinal Pull the control upwards to raise or push - the height of the head restraint, it downwards to lower, as many times as - the seat backrest angle, necessary to obtain the position required. - the seat cushion height, - the longitudinal position of the seat, - the height and reach of the steering wheel, - the rear view mirror and door mirrors. Driver seat backrest angle

F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards. When your seat is at the correct distance, move it forwards and backwards slightly without using the control bar to ensure the seat is properly locked. F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. Once these adjustments have been made, check that the instrument panel can be viewed correctly from your driving position.

57 Ease of use and comfort Passenger seat backrest angle Table position for the front Electric adjustments passenger seat backrest To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine running.

Longitudinal (driver seat)

F Pull the control upwards or turn the knob to adjust the backrest. When the backrest is correctly inclined, release Check that no object, either on or the control. underneath the seat, could hinder its movement. F Push the control forwards or backwards to To prevent the backrest from suddenly F Place the head restraint in the low position, slide the seat. folding forwards and hitting you, hold the raise the armrest and fold the tray on the backrest with your back or hand while you back of the seat. Backrest angle move the control. F Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest forwards. To return to the normal position, guide the backrest backwards until it locks into place. This position, together with that of the rear seats, allows you to transport long objects inside the vehicle.

In this position, the backrest can support a maximum load of 30 kg. F Tilt the control forwards or backwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest. 58 Ease of use and comfort Cushion height and angle Two positions can be stored and recalled, using Additional adjustments the buttons on the side of the driver's seat. Head restraint height Storing a position using buttons M/1/2 F Switch on the ignition. F Adjust your seat. F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds. 3 An audible signal indicates that the position has been stored. F To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards. F Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or Storing a new position overwrites the previous F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A downwards to obtain the required height. position. and push down on the head restraint at the F Tilt the front part of the control upwards or same time. downwards to obtain the desired angle. Recalling a stored position The head restraint has a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety F With the ignition on or the engine device in case of impact. running, press button 1 or 2 to recall the Storing driving positions corresponding position. The adjustment is correct when the An audible signal indicates the completion of upper edge of the head restraint is the adjustment. level with the top of the head. You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls. Removing a head restraint A stored position cannot be recalled while F driving. To remove the head restraint, press the lug Recalling stored positions is deactivated A and pull the head restraint upwards. F 45 seconds after switching off the ignition. To put the head restraint back in place, engage the head restraint stems in the openings, keeping them in line with the seat backrest and press the lug A at the same System which registers the electrical settings time. of the driver's seat.

59 Ease of use and comfort

Relax head restraints Massage function Electric leg rest Activation/Deactivation Passenger seat with manual adjustments

Depending on the version, you can fold the sides for greater comfort. F Press this button. Never drive with the head restraints Its indicator lamp comes on and the F Press the front or rear part of the control to removed; they must be fitted and correctly massage function is activated for unfold or fold the leg rest. adjusted. a period of 1 hour. The movement stops when your release the During this time, massage is performed in control. Electric lumbar adjustment 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes of break). After one hour the function is deactivated, the Electric passenger seat indicator lamp goes off. Deactivate the massage function by pressing this button, its indicator lamp goes off. This function provides a lumbar massage to the occupants in front; it only operates when the engine is running as well as in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system.

Adjustment of intensity F Press the control to obtain the desired Press this button to choose one of lumbar support. the two available levels of massage intensity. 60 Ease of use and comfort

F Push the control forwards or rearwards to Do not use the function when the seat Prolonged use at the highest setting is unfold or fold the leg rest. is not occupied. not recommended for those with sensitive The movement stops when your release the Reduce the intensity of the heating as skin. control. soon as possible. There is a risk of burns for people whose When the seat and passenger perception of heat is impaired (illness, compartment have reached an taking medication, for example). Prior to handling the leg rest, make sure adequate temperature, you can stop There is a risk of overheating the system if that nothing obstructs the movement. the function; reducing the consumption material with insulating properties is used, of electrical current reduces fuel such as cushions or seat covers. 3 consumption. Do not use the function: - if wearing damp clothing, Heated seats - if child seats are fitted. To avoid breaking the heating element in the seat: - do not place heavy objects on the seat, - do not kneel or stand on the seat, - do not place sharp objects on the seat, - do not spill liquids onto the seat. To avoid the risk of short-circuit: - do not use liquid products for cleaning the seat, - never use the heating function when the seat is damp. F Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and select the level of heating required: 0: Off. 1: Low. 2: Medium. 3: High.

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

61 Ease of use and comfort

Front armrest A. Longitudinal adjustment: lift the lever. B. Tilt angle adjustment: pull the strap and Height adjustment push the seat back. C. Folding the seat: give a firm upward pull on the strap to unlock the seat. D. Folding the seat from the back: pull the strap then push the backrest forward.

Longitudinal adjustment

F Lower the armrest completely. F Lift it again to the desired position (low, intermediate or high). F Once it is in the high position, lift it to unlock it and bring it to the low position.

Second row seats

The 3 seats of the 2nd row are independent and are the same width. Their backrests are F Lift lever A, at the front of the seat cushion adjustable to adapt the boot load space. and adjust the seat as required.

62 Ease of use and comfort "Comfort" position Rear head restraints Relax head restraints

3

The rear head restraints are removable and Depending on the version, you can fold the have two positions: sides to obtain a better comfortable position. F Pull strap B and push the seat back. - high, the position for use, The backrest tilts and the cushion rotates - low, the position for storage. slightly. To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. Never drive with the head restraints To lower it, press the lug A then push the head removed; they must be fitted and correctly Returning the seat to its initial restraint downwards. adjusted. position To remove it: F Pull strap B and push the seat forward. - move the head restraint to the high position, Flat floor - press the lug A while pulling the head restraint upwards. To replace it: - engage the head restraint rods in the Do not allow children to operate the apertures, keeping the head restraint in line Each seat folds down to the floor to adapt the seats unsupervised. with the seat backrest. boot volume as required.

Folding the seat F Place the seats in the maximum rearwards longitudinal position.

63 Ease of use and comfort

From outside the vehicle You can fold the second row seat(s) directly Before performing any operations on the from the boot, after having first folded the third rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat row seats. belts, make sure that the side belts are F Pull strap D to unlock the desired seat and properly tensioned. The central seat belt give the backrest a slight push forward. To must be put away. Secure the buckles prevent any damage to the mechanism, of the three seat belts to their anchoring strap D will unclip if excessive force is points. applied. It is just a matter of clipping it back into place to make the system operational again. Continuity panels

F Give a firm upward pull on strap C, as Replacing the seat shown by the arrow, to unlock the seat; keep pulling the strap until the seat is completely folded. Push the backrest slightly forward so that the backrest tilts and folds over the cushion. The seat and cushion fold down to the floor.

From the boot, for example when loading Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom of the backrest, which, once unfolded: - allows for a continuous loading surface in the boot, whatever the position of the seats, F If necessary, straighten the continuity - prevents objects from sliding beneath the panels of the 2nd row of seats and lock 2nd row seats. them. F Raise the backrest and push it back until it latches into place.

These continuity panels are not designed to support a weight greater than 30 kg.

64 Ease of use and comfort

Unlocking/Locking the continuity panels Before moving the seats, make sure that Replacing the seat from F Before unfolding the continuity panels, the trays behind the front row seats are check that the 2nd row seats are moved outside the vehicle, with properly stowed. back as far as possible. door open F Slide the latch of the continuity panel F If passengers are seated in the third row seats: upwards to unlock it. Pull lever E. The seat unlocks and the cushion comes up against the backrest. F Straighten out the continuity panel, then F manually push the seat and cushion back as F Keep lever E up by pushing it forwards. The slide the latch downwards to lock it. far as it can go; the seat does not return to seat and cushion slide towards the front the maximum back position, leaving space seat. free for the third row passengers' legs, 3 This frees space behind the seat, allowing F fold the cushion until it locks. the third row seat passengers to get into their seats. Access to third row seats Make sure there is nothing on or under the cushion of the seat you want to move. Getting out of the vehicle from third row seats If this system fails (lever E), the third row passengers can also get out after having Third row seats are accessed via the second folded the backrest of the second row row lateral seats. seats using strap D. Do not let children operate the seats unsupervised.

Third row seats Concertina boards The two rigid concertina boards, which are built F Lift lever E. The seat unlocks and the in to the vehicle, cover the two third row seats, cushion moves up to the backrest. when these are in the folded away position. F Push the backrest holding lever E upwards.

65 Ease of use and comfort

Each of the two boards can support Installing the seats Seat storage a maximum load of 100 kg.

Folding the concertina boards

F Remove the load space cover. F Straighten the continuity panels of the For more information on the Interior second row of seats and lock them in place. fittings and particularly on the load space F Lower the head restraints. F Pull the strap, the 3 parts of the board fold into cover, refer to the corresponding section. Correctly position the concertina board F concertina form. Straighten the continuity panels of the vertically behind the seat. F rd When the third row seats are straightened, second row of seats and lock them in place. Make sure that the seat belts of the 3 row F these folded concertina boards can be left: Fold the concertina board and straighten it of seats are correctly fastened to the loops - either flat behind the seats, vertically. and that they do not have any creases. F F - or in the vertical position, Pull strap F, located behind the backrest Pull strap G, located at the bottom of the thus clearing the inside of the seat as a storage of the seat. The backrest tilts backwards backrest of the seat. The seat is unlocked. F space. bringing the cushion. The seat locks in the Then, push the backrest slightly forwards. open position. The backrest tilts and folds on the cushion. The folded seat is arranged at the back of its storage area provided for this purpose. F Put the concertina boards back above the folded down seats.

66 Ease of use and comfort

Before working on the seats of the third row, straighten the rigid boards of the seats of the second row and lock them in place. Do not try to fold a seat in the third row without having opened it until the backrest 4 seats 6 seats is fully locked. Do not leave objects on the cushion or below the cushion of the seats of the third 3 row, when you fold them. Do not guide strap G when storing the seat, your may jam your fingers. Do not let children manipulate the seats 3 seats Transporting items unsupervised.

Seat modular design and configuration Transporting items 5 seats Configuration examples Configuration examples

4 seats

5 seats 7 seats

67 Ease of use and comfort

In order to easily adapt your interior Mirrors Adjustment space, you can fold all of the rear seats individually and fold them onto the second Door mirrors row floor, and beneath the floor on the third row. This gives you a continuous load floor up to the back of the front seats. Folding or unfolding the seats must only be done with the vehicle stationary. F Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror. F Move control B in any of the four directions to adjust. F Return control A to the central position. Steering wheel adjustment Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary As a safety measure, the mirrors should for overtaking or parking. be adjusted to reduce the blind spots. They can also be folded for parking in narrow Objects seen in the mirror are in reality spaces. closer than they appear. Take this into account when assessing the distance of vehicles approaching from Demisting – Defrosting behind. Demisting-defrosting of the door F When stationary, pull the control lever mirrors operates with the engine to release the steering wheel adjustment running, by switching on the heated Folding mechanism. rear screen. F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving F From outside: lock the vehicle using the position. electronic key or the "​Keyless Entry and F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel. Starting" system. For more information on Rear screen F From inside: with the ignition on, pull demist - defrost, refer to the associated As a safety measure, these adjustments the control A from the central position section. should only be carried out with the vehicle rearwards. stationary.

68 Ease of use and comfort

They return to their initial position: F Push the lever to change to the normal If the mirrors are folded using control A, - a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear, "day" position. they will not unfold when the vehicle is - once the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph unlocked. Pull again on control A. (10 km/h), Automatic "electrochrome" model - on switching off the engine. This function can be activated/deactivated in Unfolding the Driving menu of the touch screen. F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the "Comfort" and "Mirror adaptation in electronic key or the "​Keyless Entry and reverse". 3 Starting" system. F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A from the central position Rear view mirror rearwards. Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the This system automatically and progressively The folding and unfolding of the door nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, changes between day and night use by means mirrors using the remote control can be headlamps from other vehicles, etc. of a sensor measuring the light coming from the deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or rear of the vehicle. a qualified workshop. Manual model In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens If necessary, the mirrors can be folded automatically when reverse gear is manually. engaged.

Child surveillance mirror Automatic tilting in reverse gear

System which provides a view of the ground during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear. Adjustment With the engine running, on engaging reverse F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards. directed correctly in the "day" position. Day/night position F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- dazzle position. 69 Ease of use and comfort A child surveillance mirror is installed above the Control panel 2. Front quarter window demisting/defrosting interior mirror. This allows you to keep watch vents. over the passengers in the back of the vehicle The controls of this system are accessible in the 3. Front side window demisting/defrosting and facilitates discussion between passengers Air conditioning menu of the touch screen A. vents. in the front and the back without needing to The demisting/defrosting controls for the Adjustable and closable side air vents. adjust the mirror and without turning around. It windscreen and rear screen are located to the 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents. can be easily folded to avoid dazzle. left of the touch screen. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. 6. Side vents of the 2nd row. Ventilation 7. Air outlets to the rear footwells of the Air distribution second row. Air intake 8. Sunshine sensor. The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

Air treatment The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver: - direct arrival in the passenger compartment (air intake), - passage through a heating circuit (heating), - passage through a cooling circuit (air conditioning).

1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.

70 Ease of use and comfort

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, In order for these systems to be fully F To ensure correct operation of the first air the passenger compartment for effective, follow the operation and air conditioning system, you are also a few moments. maintenance guidelines below: advised to have it checked regularly as Put the air flow control at a setting high F To ensure that the air is distributed recommended in the Maintenance and enough to quickly change the air in the evenly, keep the external air intake Warranty Guide. passenger compartment. grilles at the base of the windscreen, the F If the system does not produce cold air, nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and switch it off and contact a CITROËN 3 the air extractor in the boot free from dealer or a qualified workshop. The condensation created by the air obstructions. When towing the maximum load on a steep conditioning results in a discharge of water F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, gradient in high temperatures, switching off under the vehicle which is perfectly normal. located on the dashboard; this is used the air conditioning increases the available for regulation of the automatic air engine power and so improves the towing conditioning system. ability. Stop & Start F Operate the air conditioning system for To avoid the windows misting up and The heating and air conditioning systems at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice deterioration in the quality of the air: only work when the engine is running. a month to keep it in perfect working - do not drive for too long with the To maintain a comfortable temperature order. ventilation switched off. in the passenger compartment, you may F Ensure that the passenger compartment - do not keep air recirculation set for an temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start filter is in good condition and have the extended period. system. filter elements replaced regularly. We For more information on Stop & Start, recommend the use of a combined refer to the corresponding section. passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).

71 Ease of use and comfort Air flow adjustment Illumination of the button indicates the Heating presence of pulsed air in the specified The heating only operates when the engine is F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to direction. running. decrease or increase the speed of the air For a uniform distribution of air in the Press the Air conditioning menu button to booster fan. passenger compartment, the three buttons can display the system controls page. be activated simultaneously. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in progressively as the speed of the fan is increased. Air intake/Air recirculation By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are For more information on stopping ventilation. Recirculation of interior air, refer to the corresponding section.

Avoid driving for too long without ventilation – risk of misting and Dual-zone temperature- deterioration of air quality! regulated manual air conditioning The manual air conditioning operates with the 1. Temperature adjustment. Air distribution adjustment engine running. 2. Air flow adjustment. The temperature at the nozzles and vents 3. Air distribution adjustment. You can vary the air distribution in the is regulated by the system according to the 4. Air intake/Air recirculation. passenger compartment using the buttons 3. temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature setting. Windscreen. Press the Air conditioning menu button to Temperature adjustment display the system controls page.

F Press one of the arrows 1, or move the Footwells. slider from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your liking.

Central and side vents.

72 Ease of use and comfort Air flow adjustment For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger compartment, the three buttons can F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to be activated simultaneously. decrease or increase the speed of the air booster fan. Air intake/Air recirculation The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in progressively as the speed of the fan is For more information on Recirculation of increased. interior air, refer to the corresponding section. By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are stopping ventilation. 3 1. Temperature adjustment on driver/ Air conditioning on/off passenger side. Avoid driving for too long without The air conditioning is designed to operate 2. Air flow adjustment. ventilation – risk of misting and deterioration of air quality! effectively in all seasons, with the windows 3. Air distribution adjustment. closed. 4. Air intake/Air recirculation. It enables you to: 5. Air conditioning on/off. - lower the temperature, in summer, Air distribution adjustment - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3°C. You can vary the air distribution in the Temperature adjustment F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air passenger compartment using the buttons 3. The driver and front passenger can each set conditioning system. the temperature independently of one another. Windscreen. When the indicator lamp is on, the air conditioning function is activated. F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue) or increase (red) the value. Footwells. The air conditioning does not operate when The value indicated corresponds to a level of the air flow adjustment is inhibited. comfort and not to a precise temperature. Central and side vents. To obtain cool air more quickly, you can It is recommended that you avoid a difference use recirculation of the interior air for a few of more than 3 in the settings for left and right. moments. Then return to the intake of Illumination of the button indicates the presence exterior air. of pulsed air in the specified direction. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity, condensation).

73 Ease of use and comfort Dual-zone automatic air Temperature adjustment Air distribution adjustment conditioning The driver and front passenger can each set You can vary the air distribution in the the temperature independently of one another. passenger compartment using the buttons . The air conditioning operates with the engine 3 running, but the ventilation and its controls are F Press one of the arrows 1 to decrease (blue) available with the ignition on. or increase (red) the value. Windscreen. Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in The value indicated corresponds to a level of the passenger compartment are automatic. comfort and not to a precise temperature. Footwells. It is recommended that you avoid a difference Press the button for the Air Conditioning of more than 3 in the settings for left and right. menu to display the page of controls for the air conditioning system. Central and side vents.

Air flow adjustment Illumination of the button indicates the F Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to presence of pulsed air in the specified decrease or increase the speed of the fan. direction. In AUTO mode, the three buttons are off. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in progressively as the speed of the fan is increased. Air intake/Air recirculation By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are For more information on Recirculation of stopping ventilation. interior air, refer to the corresponding section. 1. Temperature adjustment on driver/ "- - -" is displayed. passenger side. Air conditioning on/off 2. Air flow adjustment. Avoid driving too long without ventilation 3. Air distribution adjustment. – risk of misting and deterioration of air The air conditioning is designed to operate 4. Air intake/Air recirculation. quality! effectively in all seasons, with the windows 5. Air conditioning on/off. closed. 6. Automatic mode. It enables you to: 7. Mono function. - lower the temperature, in summer, 8. Access to the secondary page. 74 Ease of use and comfort

- increase the effectiveness of the demisting F To change the current setting, You can always choose to change a setting in winter, above 3°C. press the button several times manually. In this case, the automatic comfort Mode AUTO in succession to access the programme is deactivated. F Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air desired mode: conditioning system. F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate the "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by automatic comfort programme again. When the indicator lamp is on, the air limiting air flow. conditioning function is activated.

"Normal": offers the best compromise between "Mono" function The air conditioning does not operate when a comfortable temperature and quiet operation The comfort setting for the passenger's side 3 the air flow adjustment is inhibited. (default setting). can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting To obtain cool air more quickly, you can "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. (mono-zone). use recirculation of the interior air for a few moments. Then return to the intake of This setting is associated with AUTO mode F Press the button 7 to activate/deactivate the exterior air. only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, "Mono" function. Switching off the air conditioning may result the last selected setting remains. The function is deactivated automatically when in some discomfort (humidity, condensation). Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO the passenger uses their temperature setting mode if deactivated. buttons.

Automatic comfort "Rear" function programme In cold weather with the engine cold, the air flow is increased gradually until the This function gives rear passengers access to F Press the "AUTO" button 6 to activate or comfort setting has been reached, in order the adjustment controls and enables: deactivate the automatic mode of the air to limit the delivery of cold air into the - air conditioned air to be circulated by the 2nd conditioning system. passenger compartment. row outlets, The air conditioning system operates On entering the vehicle, if the interior - recirculated interior air to be circulated by temperature is much colder or warmer automatically: the system manages the the 3rd row outlets, temperature, air flow and air distribution in the than the comfort setting requested, there passenger compartment in an optimum way is no need to alter the value displayed in From the secondary page of the Air according to the comfort level you have selected. order to reach more quickly the required conditioning menu: level of comfort. The system automatically F Go to the secondary page by pressing F Press this button to activate/ corrects the temperature difference as button 8 "OPTIONS" to adjust the automatic deactivate the "Rear" function. quickly as possible. comfort programme by choosing one of the available settings. 75 Ease of use and comfort

Settings for passengers in the Settings for passengers in the This function does not activate the air 2nd row third row conditioning. You can make use of the residual heat in the engine to warm the passenger compartment using the temperature setting buttons.

Recirculation of interior air The intake of exterior air helps avoid and eliminate misting of the windscreen and side windows. Recirculation of the interior air isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes.

F Press on the vent's shutter. When required, this function can also be F Adjust the air flow of both vents using the used to speed up the heating or cooling of the passenger compartment. F Turn the top dial to open or close the rear dial with four positions (off, low, medium, vent. high). F Press button 4 to recirculate the interior air F Turn the lower dial to decrease (to the left) F Direct the vent by turning the shutter. or to permit the intake of outside air. or increase (to the right) the air flow. When the indicator lamp is on, the air Ventilation with ignition on recirculation function is activated, the intake of function exterior air is inhibited. With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation system and access the Air conditioning menu Avoid the prolonged use of interior to control the air flow and air distribution in the air recirculation – Risk of misting and passenger compartment. deterioration of air quality! This function is available for a few minutes, depending on the state of charge of the battery of your vehicle.

76 Ease of use and comfort

Front demist – defrost Rear screen demist – Rear screen demisting/defrosting can only defrost be operated when the engine is running.

Fragrance diffuser Diffuses a fragrance in the passenger compartment from the central air vents. 3

Your diffuser is fitted with an empty On/Off On/Off cartridge when your vehicle is delivered. You therefore need to install a cartridge F Press this button to demist or defrost the F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear before use. windscreen and side windows as quickly as screen and, depending on version, the door possible. The indicator lamp in the button mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. comes on. The system automatically manages the air Flow adjustment Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically conditioning (depending on version), air to prevent excessive electrical consumption. flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side F It is possible to stop the demisting/ windows. defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing this button again. F To switch off demisting/defrosting, press The indicator lamp in the button goes off. this button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. Switch off the demisting/defrosting of With Stop & Start, when demisting/ the rear screen and door mirrors as defrosting has been activated, STOP soon as appropriate, as lower current mode is not available. consumption results in reduced fuel F Turn button A to adjust (left to decrease, consumption. right to increase) or stop (completely to the left) the fragranced air flow. The central vents must be open.

77 Ease of use and comfort

After installing or replacing the cartridge: The average use per cartridge is 3 months Diffuser button F put the diffuser back in its housing, at the rate of one hour per day. F turn it a quarter of a turn to the right.

Removing the diffuser

Replacing a cartridge

The diffuser button A is independent of the cartridge. The cartridges are delivered without the button A. The diffuser button A can only be fixed into the F Push button A by turning it a quarter turn central control panel with a cartridge. completely to the end. Therefore always keep the button A and F Remove the diffuser from the dashboard a cartridge. F Replace your cartridge (see "Replacing Depending on the country, replacement a cartridge"). cartridges are available online or from The diffuser refill includes a cartridge B and its CITROËN dealers, as well as any qualified sealed cover C. workshop. Inserting the diffuser F Remove the protective film D. Storage is provided for the cartridges and F Place the head of cartridge B on the diffuser covers in the glove box. button A. F Turn it a quarter turn to lock it on the button and remove the cover. F Insert the diffuser in its housing. You can replace cartridges at any time and keep the cartridges already started in their original cover.

78 Ease of use and comfort

1. Sun visor. For safety reasons, only use the Front fittings 2. Ticket holder. cartridges designed for the system. Retain the cartridge sealed covers which 3. Glove box. serve as packaging if the cartridge is not 4. Central storage. used. It includes the electric and audio sockets. Never refill or disassemble the cartridges. 5. High console with closed storage box, low Keep cartridges out of the reach of console or removable console. children or pets. 6. Cup holder. Avoid contact with the skin or eyes. 7. Door pockets. 3 In the event of ingestion, consult a doctor, 8. Storage compartment below the steering showing them the product packaging or wheel. label. (Vehicle documentation.) Never install or remove a cartridge while driving. Sliding sun visors Sliding window blinds

The sliding window blinds can protect you from brightness and sunlight. They can be adjusted manually. F Slide the window blind to the required position by pushing zone A. 79 Ease of use and comfort Sun visor supports Glove box Portable console The portable console is a removable storage space fixed to the low centre console. It includes a sliding flap, an open storage compartment and two cup holders.

Taking out the portable console

The window blinds are extended via the sun visor supports. Fold the support downwards to avoid glare from ahead. In case of glare through the door windows, release the support from its central fixing and turn it to the side. The supports are fitted with a locking system Depending on the equipment, it may include on their central fixing when rolling up the a CD player. F To open the glove box, raise the handle. window blind. To remove or replace the F Pull the unlocking control located at the It is illuminated when the lid is opened. support, it must be positioned vertically. front of the console. It is cooled by a ventilation nozzle that can be F With one hand, lift the front part of the closed manually. console. It is directly linked to your vehicle's air Do not attach or hang heavy objects on F With the other hand, take the rear part to conditioning system and is supplied with the slide rail of the sun visor blinds. free the portable console. fresh air whatever the setting required in the passenger compartment. The cooling of your glove box only functions If it is not fixed to its support, the portable when the engine is running and the air console must be stored in the boot. It conditioning is on. could turn into a projectile in the event of sudden braking or serious impact.

80 Ease of use and comfort

Deactivate the lighting by pressing the button Putting the portable console Connect only one device at a time to at the top. back in place the socket (no extension or multi-way Depending on equipment, this may include: connector). - 1 x 230 V socket, Connect only devices with class II - 1 x 12 V socket, insulation (shown on the device). - 1 x USB port, Do not use a device with a metal case - 1 x JACK socket. (electric shaver,etc.). As a safety measure, when electrical 230 V/50 Hz socket consumption is high and when required by 3 the vehicle's electrical system (particular weather conditions, electrical overload, etc.), the current supply to the socket will be F Perform the steps in reversed order. Check cut off; the green indicator lamp goes off. AC 230V that the console is properly locked. 50Hz 120W 12 V socket Central storage A 230 V/50 Hz socket (max. power: 120 W) is fitted in the central storage. To use the socket: F open the central storage, F check that the indicator lamp is on green, F connect your multimedia or other electrical device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, baby food warmer, etc.). F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power: This socket works with the engine running, as 120 W), lift the cover and connect a suitable well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start. adaptor. In the event of a fault with the socket, the green indicator lamp flashes. Do not exceed the maximum power rating F Pull the handle and lower the lid to open the Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or of the socket (otherwise this could cause central storage. a qualified workshop. damage to your portable device). It is illuminated when opened.

81 Ease of use and comfort

The connection of an electrical device USB port Mats not approved by CITROËN, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the Fitting operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.

The USB port is located in the central storage. JACK socket It allows the connection of a portable device or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio files which are sent to your audio system and played via the vehicle's speakers. You can manage these files using the steering mounted or touch screen controls.

To connect a portable device so that you When the USB port is used, the portable can listen to your music files via the vehicle's device charges automatically. speakers. A message is displayed if the power drawn The management of the files is done using your by the portable device exceeds the current portable device. supplied by the vehicle. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached. For more information on Audio and The other mats are simply placed on the telematics and in particular the use of carpet. this equipment, refer to the corresponding section.

82 Ease of use and comfort Removing Storage boxes Storage compartment below the steering wheel To remove the mat on the driver's side: Depending on equipment, there are storage F move the seat as far back as possible, boxes located under the front seats. F unclip the fixings, F remove the mat. Opening Refitting To refit the mat on the driver's side: F 3 position the mat correctly, F put on the fixings again by pressing, F check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, - never fit one mat on top of another. F Lift the handle and lower the storage box The use of mats not approved by cover. CITROËN may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the Do not place heavy objects in the storage cruise control/speed limiter. This storage below the steering wheel is used boxes. The mats approved by CITROËN have two to store the vehicle's on-board documentation. fixings located below the seat.

83 Ease of use and comfort For security reasons, these trays retract Side blinds Rear fittings downwards if excessive pressure is exerted. Aircraft trays Closed tray Individual reading lamp

Fitted to the windows in row 2, they protect the passenger compartment from the sun's rays. F Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the hook . Open tray B

The reading lamps C may be integrated into Storage boxes the backrests of the front seats, behind the trays. They illuminate the top of the tray without disturbing the other passengers. They are only accessible when the tray is lowered. F Press the "On/Off" button to switch the reading lamp on or off.

These trays, fixed to the back of the front seats, includes a recessed cup holder A and a retaining strap B. There are two storage boxes located beneath F Pull the tray to lower it. the rear passenger footwells. F To fold the tray away, pull it up to the locking To open them, lift the cover by the notch. latch. 84 Ease of use and comfort 12 V accessory socket Boot fittings Rear shelf

3

To remove the shelf: F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power: F release the two cords, 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect F gently lift the shelf, then remove it. a suitable adaptor. There are several ways of storing it: 1. Rear shelf - either upright behind the front seats, (see details opposite) - or flat on the bottom of the boot. Do not exceed the maximum power rating 2. Hooks of the socket (risk of damage to your (see details opposite) device). 3. Strap Hooks 4. Stowing rings The connection of an electrical device 5. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts) not approved by CITROËN, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.

These can be used to secure shopping bags.

85 Ease of use and comfort

Boot fittings Load space cover The mobile flap avoids interference with the second row passengers when the seats are in the "comfort" position.

In 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind the second row seats, with the third row seats Removal stored folded away. In 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the third row seats.

Installation

1. Load space cover 2. Concertina boards 3. 12 V socket (max power: 120 Watts) 4. Armrest with cup holder and storage F Remove the guides of the roller from the compartment rails in pillars B. F 5. Storage area of the load space cover Guide the roller as it reels in. F Unlock the roller by pressing one of the 6. Open storage compartment handles located at the ends of the roller 7. Low stowing rings bracket. F Position the left and right ends of the roller in cut-outs A, with the mobile flap at the front. F Pull out the roller until it reaches the boot pillars. F Insert the guides of the roller into the rails in pillars B.

86 Ease of use and comfort

rd 1. Front courtesy lamp Storage behind the 3 row seats When sharp deceleration occurs, objects 2. Front map reading lamps placed on the load space cover can turn into projectiles. 3. Rear courtesy lamp 4. Rear map reading lamps

Front – rear courtesy lamps Courtesy lamps In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually: 3 - when you unlock the vehicle, - when the electronic key is removed from the reader, - when opening a door, F rd Make sure that the 3 row seats are folded. - when the remote control locking button is F Fold the first two concertina boards. activated, in order to locate your vehicle. F Position the roller in the space located It will only be possible to switch on the door above the armrest, side by side, tilting it mirror spotlamps if the courtesy lamp is in this slightly. position. F Slide the roller to the stop position, until it It switches off gradually: reaches the notches arranged at the back of - when the vehicle is locked, the boot, with the two hinges facing down. - when the ignition is switched on, F Unfold the third row seats. - 30 seconds after the last door is closed. The folded concertina boards can be placed in the horizontal or upright position.

Permanently off. To fold the 3rd row seats with the roller stored at the back, it is necessary to raise the concertina boards in order to give access to the seat Permanent lighting. unlocking controls (red straps).

87 Ease of use and comfort Front – rear map reading Switching on Footwell lighting lamps F With the ignition on, operate the corresponding switch.

Take care not to put anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes, At night, the dashboard, centre console and - in energy economy mode, courtesy lamps come on automatically once approximately thirty seconds, the sidelamps are lit. - with the engine running, unlimited. The interior ambient lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off. The interior ambient lighting can be activated or Interior ambient lighting deactivated in the Driving menu by selecting The dimmed passenger compartment lighting the "Vehicle settings" tab, then "Comfort" improves visibility in the vehicle when the light and "Mood lighting". is poor. The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor. Switching on Its operation is the same as the courtesy lamps. The lamps come on when one of the doors is opened.

88 Ease of use and comfort

Panoramic glass sunroof The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly. It has an electrically-controlled blind. Be particularly aware of children when operating the blind. Opening/closing the roof blind Reinitalisation 3

F Turn control A to begin sliding the roof blind to the desired position (positions 1 to 4). In the event of a failure or battery disconnection while the blind is moving or soon after it F To close the roof blind, turn control A to stops, the safety anti-pinch function must be position 0. reinitialised: F put the blind in the closed position, Safety anti-pinch F press the button B for about two seconds. This blind has an anti-pinch function. At the end of its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle while closing, it stops and moves back slightly. If the blind encounters an obstacle, you should reverse the movement by using the control.

89 Lighting and visibility Main lighting Automatic illumination of headlamps. Lighting control stalk Daytime running lamps/Dipped beam/Main beam. In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence Sidelamps. of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is Dipped or main beam headlamps. normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes. Without AUTO lighting

Headlamp dipping If one or more lamps fails, a message Pull the stalk towards you to switch between asks you to check the lamp or lamps dipped and main beam headlamps or to concerned. activate automatic headlamp dipping. In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps Driving abroad With AUTO lighting temporarily ("headlamp flash"), for as long as Halogen headlamps the stalk is kept pulled. If planning to use your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the dipped beam headlamps must be Displays adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers. Contact a CITROËN dealer or Illumination of the corresponding indicator qualified workshop. lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the Xenon headlamps lighting selected is switched on. The design of the dipped beam headlamps allows, without modification, driving in Selection of main lighting mode a country that drives on the other side of the road to the country in which your Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with vehicle was sold. the marking. Lighting off (ignition off)/Daytime running lamps (engine running).

90 Lighting and visibility

Rear foglamps F once backwards to switch off the rear foglamps, F backwards a second time to switch off the front foglamps. F Turn the sensor ring forwards to switch on the foglamps. If the lights are switched off automatically or F Turn the sensor ring backwards to switch off the dipped beam headlamps are switched off the foglamps. manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on. F If the dipped beam headlamps are Turn the ring backwards to switch off the switched off manually, the rear foglamps foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off. The sidelamps and the rear direction also switch off. indicators are situated on the tailgate. During lighting, the opening of the tailgate 4 Opening the tailgate prevents the provokes the automatic switching of these foglamps lighting up. lamps towards the fitted lamps in the rear Opening the tailgate when the lamps are bumpers to maintain the safety of the With front and rear foglamps on switches them off automatically along vehicle. with the indicator lamp in the instrument panel. On closing the tailgate, they do not light up automatically: it will be necessary Foglamps to use the control. They operate with the dipped and main beam headlamps. Front and rear foglamps With rear foglamps only

Turn and release the ring: F once forwards to switch on the front foglamps, F forwards a second time to switch on the rear foglamps.

91 Lighting and visibility

In good or rainy weather, by both day Switching on the lighting after the Three flashes and night, the front foglamps and the ignition is switched off F Press briefly upwards or downwards, rear foglamps are prohibited. In these To reactivate the lighting control stalk, without going beyond the point of situations, the power of their beams may rotate ring A to the 0 position – lamps off, resistance; the direction indicators will flash dazzle other drivers. They should only be then to the desired position. 3 times. used in fog or falling snow. On opening the driver's door a temporary In these weather conditions, it is your audible signal warns the driver that the responsibility to switch on the foglamps lighting is on. Parking lamps and dipped headlamps manually as the It will go off automatically after a period of Vehicle side marking by illumination of the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient time that depends on the state of charge sidelamps on the traffic side only. light. in battery (entering energy economy Switch off the front and rear foglamps mode). when they are no longer necessary.

Direction indicators (flashers)

Switching off of the lighting when the ignition is switched off On switching off the ignition, all of the lighting turns off immediately, except for dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home lighting is activated. F Depending on version, within one minute of switching off the ignition, operate the lighting control stalk up or down depending on the traffic side (for example, when F Left: lower the lighting control stalk passing parking on the right, push the lighting the point of resistance. control stalk downwards; the left-hand F Right: raise the lighting control stalk passing sidelamps come on). the point of resistance. This is confirmed by an audible signal and illumination of the corresponding direction indicator lamp in the instrument panel. 92 Lighting and visibility

To switch off the parking lamps, return the Automatic Operating fault lighting control stalk to the central position. With the "Automatic headlamp illumination" In the event of a malfunction of the function activated (lighting control stalk sunshine sensor, the lighting comes in the AUTO position), under low ambient on, this warning lamp is displayed in light, the dipped beam headlamps come on the instrument panel accompanied Guide-me-home headlamps automatically when the ignition is switched off. by an audible signal and/or Activation, deactivation and the duration of the a message. guide-me-home lighting are set in the touch Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified screen's Driving menu. workshop. Select "Guide-me-home lighting" to activate or deactivate the function. In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may To set the duration, select the icon of the detect sufficient light. In this case, the "Guide-me-home lighting" function. lighting will not come on automatically. 4 Do not cover the sunshine sensor, integrated with the rain sensor and located Automatic illumination of at the top of the windscreen behind the headlamps rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled. The temporary illumination of the dipped beam When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been a low level of ambient light is detected by the switched off makes the driver's exit easier sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, when the light is poor. sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are Front daytime running switched on automatically, without any action lamps (LEDs) Manual on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as Activation automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps As soon as the brightness returns to using the lighting control stalk. a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers F Another "headlamp flash" switches the are switched off, the lamps are switched off function off. automatically. Deactivation Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off automatically at the end of a given period of time. 93 Lighting and visibility

They come on automatically when the engine - when you use the remote control to locate Programming is started, when the lighting control stalk is in the vehicle. position "0" or "AUTO". The activation, deactivation and choice of welcome lighting duration are done in the Switching off Driving menu of the touch screen. Select " " on the " Door mirror spotlamps They go off automatically after 30 seconds. Welcome lighting Vehicle settings" tab. Use the arrows or the slider to adjust the lighting duration. Exterior welcome lighting

The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated when the lighting control Automatic headlamp stalk is in the "AUTO" position and the level of dipping light detected by the sunshine sensor is low. System which automatically changes between dipped and main beam according to the exterior light level and the traffic conditions, using a camera located at the top of the To make your approach to the vehicle easier, Switching on windscreen. these illuminate: F Press the open padlock on - the zones facing the driver's and the remote control or one of passenger's doors, the front door handles with the This system is a driving aid. - the zones forward of the door mirrors and "Keyless Entry and Starting" The driver remains responsible for the rearward of the front doors. system. vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the prevailing conditions of light, visibility, The dipped beam headlamps and the traffic and observation of driving and Switching on sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also vehicle regulations. When the courtesy lamp is in this unlocked. position, the spotlamps come on automatically: Switching off The system will be operational as soon as you have exceeded 16 mph (25 km/h). - when you unlock the vehicle, The exterior welcome lighting switches off If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), - when removing the electronic key from the reader, automatically after a set time, when the ignition the system no longer operates. - when opening a door, is switched on or on locking the vehicle. 94 Lighting and visibility

If the ambient light level is very low and the traffic conditions permit:

- main beam comes on automatically: these indicator lamps come on in the instrument panel.

The system is deactivated when you switch on the foglamps or when the system detects thick fog. When you switch off the foglamps or as soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick fog, the Activation/Deactivation function reactivates automatically. 4 F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the "AUTO" position. This indicator lamp goes off while the function is deactivated. F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving functions" tab then "Automatic headlamp dip". Pause If the situation requires a change of headlamp Operation beam, the driver can take over at any time. If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of and the system changes to "automatic the main beam headlamps: illumination of headlamps" mode: - dipped beam is kept on, these - if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator lamps come on in the indicator lamps were on, the system instrument panel. changes to main beam, - if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator lamps were on, the system changes to dipped beam.

95 Lighting and visibility

To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps 1. 5 people + maximum authorised load. Clean the windscreen regularly, again. -. Intermediate setting. particularly the area in front of the camera. The internal surface of the windscreen can 2. Driver + maximum authorised load. -. Intermediate setting. The system may suffer interference or not also become misted around the camera. work correctly: In humid and cold weather, demist the 3. 5 people + maximum authorised load in - under poor visibility conditions (snow, windscreen regularly. the boot. heavy rain, etc.), Do not allow snow to accumulate on the - if the windscreen is dirty, misted or bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of conceal the detection camera. Clean the front bumper, especially around the camera, The initial setting is position 0. - if the vehicle is facing highly reflective the radar, removing mud, snow, etc. signs. When the system detects thick fog, it temporarily deactivates the function. Cornering lighting The system is not able to detect: - road users that do not have their own lighting, such as pedestrians, - vehicles whose lighting is obscured Headlamp adjustment (for example: vehicles running behind a safety barrier on a motorway), - vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on winding roads, on crossroads.

If your vehicle is equipped with it, this system makes use of the beam from a front foglamp To avoid causing a nuisance to other road to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted main or dipped beam headlamps are on and for height according to the vehicle's load. the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats. manoeuvres, etc.). -. Intermediate setting. 96 Lighting and visibility Switching off The system does not operate: - below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel, - above 25 mph (40 km/h), - when reverse gear is engaged.

The cornering lighting can be activated or deactivated in the Driving menu. F Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then "Driving lighting" and "Directional with cornering lighting headlamps". with directional lighting 4 Directional lighting When the dipped or main beams are on, this function allows the light beam to better follow the road. Associated with xenon lamps, this function improves the quality of your lighting while cornering.

The system does not operate: without cornering lighting - when stationary or at very low speeds, without directional lighting - when reverse gear is engaged. Switching on Operating fault This system starts: - when the corresponding direction indicator If a fault occurs, these warning is switched on, lamps are displayed on the or instrument panel, accompanied by - from a certain angle of rotation of the an audible signal and a message. steering wheel. 97 Lighting and visibility

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Do not operate the wipers on a dry Windscreen wipers workshop. windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold The front windscreen wiper system is The directional lighting can be activated or conditions, ensure that the wiper blades fitted with a safety device that inhibits its deactivated in the touch screen. are not stuck to the windscreen before function when detecting an obstacle such In the Driving menu, select the "Vehicle operating the wipers. as ice or snow. settings" tab, then "Driving lighting" and "Directional headlamps".

Manual controls Wiping speed selection control: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position. Wiper control stalk Fast wiping (heavy rain). Programming

Your vehicle may also include some functions Normal wiping (moderate rain). The windscreen wipers are controlled directly that can be configured: by the driver. - automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers, - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. Intermittent wiping (proportional to Without AUTO wiping the speed of the vehicle). Off.

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or Single wipe (press downwards or frost present on the windscreen, around pull the stalk briefly towards you, the wiper arms and blades and the then release). windscreen seal, before operating the wipers. With AUTO wiping or Automatic wiping (press down, then release). Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).

98 Lighting and visibility

Automatic windscreen The automatic rain sensitive windscreen In case of snow or hard frost, deactivate wipers wipers must be reactivated by pushing the the automatic rear wiper. control stalk downwards, if the ignition has The windscreen wipers operate automatically been off for more than one minute. once rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the Rear wiper selection ring: intensity of the rain without any action on the Off. part of the driver. Operating fault Switching on If a fault occurs with the automatic rain Intermittent wipe. sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Wash-wipe (set duration). Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or 4 a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, combined Reverse gear with the sunshine sensor and located at Give a short downwards push to the the top centre of the windscreen, behind When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper control stalk. the rear view mirror. will come into operation if the windscreen wiper A wiping cycle confirms that the Switch off the automatic rain sensitive is operating. instruction has been accepted. wipers when using an automatic car wash. This indicator lamp comes on in the This function can be activated or deactivated in In winter, it is advisable to wait until instrument panel and a message is the Driving menu. the windscreen is completely clear of displayed. Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then ice before activating the automatic rain "Comfort" and "Rear wiper in reverse". Switching off sensitive wipers. Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control Rear wiper In the event of snow or hard frost or stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). if a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towing device, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the vehicle parameters menu. This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.

99 Lighting and visibility Front screenwash and Headlamp wash headlamp wash Screenwash and washer jets

F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The screenwash and then the wiper operate for F In the minute following ignition switch-off, a fixed duration. any operation of the wiper control stalk will A few moments after releasing the screenwash position the wiper blades vertically. control, there is one last wipe of the screen to When the system is no longer powered, at least wipe away any excess. one minute after the ignition is switched off, it is possible to move the arms manually. F To park the wiper blades again, gently fold Washer jet adjustment the arms onto the windscreen, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk. The headlamp washers operate while the vehicle is moving and the dipped beams are on. However, to reduce the consumption of the screenwash fluid, the headlamp washers only operate with every seventh use of the To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper screenwash or every 25 miles (40 km) during blades, it is advisable to: a given journey. - handle them with care, - clean them regularly using soapy water, Special position of the - avoid using them to retain cardboard The front screenwash includes a washer jet windscreen wipers on the windscreen, height adjustment device. - replace them at the first signs of wear. If you wish to change the factory setting, turn This maintenance position allows you to the screw of each washer jet anticlockwise, release the front windscreen wiper blades in towards the "+" to raise the jet or clockwise, order to clean their rubber inserts or to replace towards the "-", to lower it. the blades. It can also be useful in winter to The arms must only be replaced by release the wiper blades from the windscreen. a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. 100 Safety

General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio recommendations points: communication transmitters - The fitting of electrical equipment Before installing a radio communication or accessories not approved by transmitter, you must contact a CITROËN CITROËN may cause excessive dealer for the specifications of compatible Labels are affixed in different locations on current consumption and faults and transmitters (frequency, maximum power, your vehicle. They include safety warnings failures with the electrical system of aerial position, specific installation and vehicle identification information. Do your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN requirements), in line with the Vehicle not remove them: they are an integral part dealer for information on the range of Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive of your vehicle. recommended accessories. (2004/104/EC). - As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers For any work on your vehicle, use or qualified workshops, equipped a qualified workshop that has the technical with the special tools required (risk information, skills and equipment required, of malfunctions of the vehicle's 5 all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to Hazard warning lamps electronic systems that could cause provide. breakdowns or serious accidents). The manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed. Depending on country regulations, some - Any modification or adaptation not safety equipment may be compulsory: intended or authorised by CITROËN high visibility safety vests, warning or carried out without meeting the triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, technical requirements defined by spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, F When you press this red button, all four the manufacturer will result in the mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. direction indicators flash. suspension of the legal and contractual They can operate with the ignition off. warranties.

101 Safety Automatic operation of "Localised Emergency Call" immediately Emergency or assistance locates your vehicle and contacts you in hazard warning lamps call your own language**, and – if necessary – When braking in an emergency, depending on requests that relevant emergency services be the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps dispatched**. In countries where the service is come on automatically. not available, or when the locating service has They switch off automatically when you next been expressly declined, the call is sent directly accelerate. to the emergency services (112) without the F You can also switch them off by pressing vehicle location. the button. If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, an emergency call is made automatically and independently of the Horn deployment of any airbags.

Localised Emergency Call * In accordance with the general conditions of use for the service available from dealers In an emergency, press and subject to technological and technical this button for more than limitations. 2 seconds. ** According to the geographic coverage of The flashing LED and the "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised voice message confirm that Assistance Call" and the official national the call has been made to the language chosen by the owner of the F Press the central part of the steering wheel. "Localised Emergency Call" vehicle. call centre*. The list of countries covered and Telematic Pressing this button again immediately cancels services is available from dealers or on the the request; the LED goes off. website for your country. The LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. Operation of the system It goes off at the end of the call. When the ignition is switched on, the indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

102 Safety

If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red: The list of countries covered and of Telematic For technical reasons and, in particular, to there is a system fault. services is available from dealers or on the improve the quality of Telematic services If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the website for your country. to customers, the manufacturer reserves back-up battery. the right to carry out updates to the In either case, emergency and assistance calls vehicle's on-board telematic system. may not function. Geolocation Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible. If you benefit from the Citroën Connect Box offer with the SOS and assistance The system's fault does not prevent the pack included, there are additional vehicle from being driven. services available to you in your personal You can deactivate geolocation by space, via the website for your country. simultaneously pressing the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance Localised Assistance Call Call" buttons, followed by pressing "Localised Assistance Call" to confirm. Press this button for more Electronic stability control 5 than 2 seconds to request To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press assistance if the vehicle breaks the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised (ESC) down. Assistance Call" buttons again, followed by Electronic stability control integrating the a press on "Localised Assistance Call" to following systems: A voice message confirms that the call has confirm. - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and been made**. electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), - emergency braking assistance (EBA), Immediately pressing this button again cancels If you purchased your vehicle outside the - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction the request. CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to control, The cancellation is confirmed by a voice have a dealer check the configuration of - dynamic stability control (DSC). message. these services and, if desired, modify it to suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, ** According to the geographic coverage of configuration is possible in the official "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised national language of your choice. Assistance Call" and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle.

103 Safety Definitions Dynamic stability control (DSC) Anti-lock braking system Anti-lock braking system (ABS) If there is a difference between the path (ABS) and electronic brake and electronic brake force followed by the vehicle and that required by force distribution (EBFD) distribution (EBFD) the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more These systems improve the stability and wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle When lit up continuously, this manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking to the required path, within the limits of the laws warning lamp indicates a fault with and contribute towards improved control in of physics. the ABS. corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of Intelligent traction control carefully at moderate speed. emergency braking. ("Snow motion") If this warning lamp comes on, in The EBFD system manages the braking Depending on version, your vehicle has conjunction with the STOP and ABS pressure wheel by wheel. a system to help driving on snow: intelligent warning lamps, an audible signal traction control. and a message, it means that the Emergency braking assistance This system detects situations of poor surface electronic brake force distribution (EBA) grip that could make it difficult to move off (EBFD) is defective. In an emergency, this system enables you to or make progress on deep fresh snow or You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is reach the optimum braking pressure more compacted snow. safe to do so. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping In these situations, the intelligent traction In both cases, have the system checked by distance. control limits the amount of wheel spin to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as It is triggered in relation to the speed at which provide the best traction and trajectory control soon as possible. the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by for your vehicle. a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and When changing wheels (tyres and rims), an increase in the effectiveness of the braking. ensure that these are approved for your vehicle. The use of snow tyres is strongly Anti-slip regulation (ASR) recommended on surfaces offering low levels of grip. When operating under normal conditions, This system (also known as Traction Control) the ABS may cause the brake pedal to optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by vibrate slightly. acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration. 104 Safety

Reactivate the system when grip conditions In emergency braking, press the brake ASR/DSC allow. pedal hard and maintain this pressure. These systems offer increased safety F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving in normal driving, but they should not functions" tab, then "Traction control". encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. Deactivation is confirmed by the display of After an impact, have these systems It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, a message. checked by a CITROËN dealer or snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip The ASR system no longer acts on the a qualified workshop. increases. It is therefore important for your operation of the engine or the brakes in the safety to keep these systems activated in event of an involuntary change of trajectory. all conditions, and particularly in difficult Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/ conditions. Dynamic stability control Reactivation of the ASR The correct operation of these systems depends on observation of the (DSC) The system is reactivated automatically every manufacturer's recommendations, not time the ignition is switched back on or from Operation only about the wheels (tyres and rims), 31 mph (50 km/h). braking and electronic components but These systems are activated automatically Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it every time the vehicle is started. also the assembly and repair procedures 5 manually: used by CITROËN dealers. They come into operation in the event of F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving To benefit in full from the effectiveness a problem with grip or trajectory. functions" tab, then "Traction control". of these systems in wintry conditions, the vehicle must be fitted with four snow This is indicated by flashing of this tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain neutral warning lamp in the instrument behaviour on the road. panel. Operating fault The illumination of this warning Deactivation of the ASR lamp, accompanied by an audible In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle signal and a message, indicates that which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft there is a fault with these systems. ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn workshop to have the systems checked. freely and regain grip.

105 Safety Seat belts Fastening 2nd row rear seat belts Front seat belts The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the Each of the rear seats is fitted with a three- seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus buckle. point seat belt with inertia reel and force limiter improving their protection. F Check that the seat belt is fastened (except for the centre rear seat). correctly by pulling the strap.

nd Unfastening 2 row rear lateral seat belts (storage) Adjusting the height of the front F Press the red button on the buckle. belt return F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

F To adjust the height of the anchorage point, squeeze the control and slide it up or down Guide the strap as it reels in and take the tongue to the notch desired. to the magnet at the lateral anchoring point. 106 Safety

nd 2 row rear central seat belt Before performing any operations on Removal and storage The seat belt for the rear central position is the rear seats, to avoid damage to the F Press the red button on the buckle. integrated into the roof. seat belts check that the lateral belts are F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. properly tensioned and fasten the tongues F Fasten the strap, flat, to the retention loop. to their anchoring point. The central seat belt must be completely reeled in. To install Ensure seat belts are always fastened when not in use.

3rd row rear seat belts To install Seat belt not fastened/ unfastened alerts 5

F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the The instrument panel includes the seat belts not right buckle. fastened warning lamp A as well as the seat belts F Insert tongue B into the left buckle. not unfastened identification warning lamp B. F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly When the system detects that a seat belt is by pulling the strap. unfastened or fastened, warning lamp A lights up as well as the corresponding dot(s) in warning lamp B. Removal and storage F Detach the seat belt strap from its retention loop located in the boot side trim. Front seat belts not fastened F Press the red button on buckle , then the B F Pull the strap and insert the tongue into the alert button on buckle A. buckle. When the ignition is switched on, warning lamp F Guide the strap as it reels in and take F Check that the seat belt is fastened A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp tongue B, then A to the magnet at the correctly by pulling the strap. come on if the driver and/or front passenger anchoring point on the roof. B have not fastened their seat belts.

107 Safety

At a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h), these Advice Installation warning lamps flash, associated with an The lower part of the strap must be audible signal, for two minutes. Beyond this The driver must ensure that passengers positioned as low as possible on the period of time, the warning lamps stay on use the seat belts correctly and that they pelvis. continuously until the seat belts are fastened. are all fastened before setting off. The upper part must be positioned in the Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, hollow of the shoulder. Rear seat belts not fastened alert always fasten your seat belt, even for In order to be effective, a seat belt must: short journeys. - be tightened as close to the body as When the ignition is switched on, with the Do not interchange the seat belt buckles possible, engine running or the vehicle moving above as they will not fulfil their role fully. - be pulled in front of you with a smooth 6 mph (10 km/h), warning lamp A and the The seat belts are fitted with an inertia movement, checking that it does not corresponding dots in warning lamp B come on reel permitting automatic adjustment of twist, for around thirty seconds, if one or more rear the length of the strap to your size. The - be used to restrain only one person, passengers have not fastened their seat belts. seat belt is stowed automatically when not - not show any signs of cuts or fraying, in use. - not be converted or modified to avoid Seat belts unfastened alert The inertia reels have an automatic affecting its performance. After the ignition is switched on, warning lamp locking device at the time of a collision, A and the corresponding dots in warning lamp during sudden braking or if the vehicle B come on if the driver and/or one or more turns over. You can release the device by passengers unfasten their seat belts. pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. These warning lamps flash for 30 seconds, Recommendations for children Before and after use, ensure that the seat accompanied by an audible signal. Beyond Use a suitable child seat if the passenger belt is reeled in correctly. this period of time, the warning lamps stay on is less than 12 years old or shorter than After folding or moving a seat or rear continuously until the seat belts are fastened. one and a half metres. bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is Never use the same seat belt to secure positioned and reeled in correctly. more than one child. Never allow a child to travel on your lap. For more information on Child seats, refer to the corresponding section.

108 Safety

Maintenance Airbags Impact detection zones In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your General information vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified This system contributes towards improving the workshop with the skills and equipment safety of passengers (with the exception of the needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able rear centre passenger) in the event of violent to provide. collisions. The airbags supplement the action Have your seat belts checked regularly of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified except the centre rear passenger belt). workshop, particularly if the straps show If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors signs of damage. record and analyse the front and side impacts Clean the seat belt straps with soapy sustained in the impact detection zones: A. Front impact zone. water or a textile cleaning product, sold by B. Side impact zone. CITROËN dealers. - in the event of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the passengers The deployment of one or more airbags (with the exception of the rear centre is accompanied by a slight emission of 5 passenger); immediately after the impact, In the event of an impact smoke and a noise, due to the detonation the airbags deflate rapidly so that they Depending on the nature and of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in do not hinder visibility or the exit of the seriousness of the impact, the the system. passengers, pyrotechnic pretensioner may be deployed This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive - in the case of a minor or rear impact or before and independently of the airbags. individuals may experience slight irritation. in certain rollover conditions, the airbags Deployment of the pretensioners is The detonation noise associated with the may not be deployed; the seat belt accompanied by a slight discharge of deployment of an airbag may result in alone contributes towards ensuring your harmless smoke and a noise, due to the a slight loss of hearing for a short time. protection in these situations. activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp The airbags do not operate when the comes on. ignition is switched off. Following an impact, have the seat This equipment will only deploy once. If belts system checked and, if necessary, a second impact occurs (during the same replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or or a subsequent accident), the airbag will a qualified workshop. not be deployed again. 109 Safety Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and and head of the front occupant of the vehicle shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the and the corresponding door trim panel. dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their forward movement. Curtain airbags System contributing towards greater protection Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area. System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front Deployment impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the The curtain airbag is deployed at the same head and thorax. time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the event of a serious side impact applied to all or steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. System which protects the driver and front to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle passenger in the event of a serious side impact on a horizontal plane and directed from the Deployment in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The airbags are deployed, except the front between the hip and the shoulder. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or passenger airbag if it is deactivated*, in the Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows. event of a serious front impact to all or part frame, door side. of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane Deployment and directed from the front to the rear of the It is deployed unilaterally in the event of Malfunction vehicle. a severe side impact covering all or part of side If this warning lamp comes on in the impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal * For more information on Deactivating instrument panel, you must contact centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane the front passenger airbag, refer to the a CITROËN dealer or a qualified and directed from the outside towards the corresponding section. workshop to have the system inside of the vehicle. checked. 110 Safety

The airbags may no longer be deployed in the Advice Front airbags event of a serious impact. Do not drive holding the steering wheel For the airbags to be fully effective, by its spokes or resting your hands on the observe the safety recommendations In the event of a minor impact or bump on centre part of the wheel. below. the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls Passengers must not place their feet on Adopt a normal and upright sitting over, the airbags may not be deployed. the dashboard. position. In the event of a rear or front collision, Do not smoke as deployment of the Fasten your seat belt, ensuring it is none of the lateral airbags are deployed. airbags can cause burns or the risk of positioned correctly. injury from a cigarette or pipe. Do not leave anything between the Never remove or pierce the steering occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, wheel or hit it violently. object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything Do not fix or attach anything to the close to or in the way of the airbag release steering wheel or dashboard, this could trajectory; this could cause injuries during cause injuries with deployment of the their deployment. airbags. Never modify the original definition of your vehicle, particularly in the area directly 5 around the airbags. After an accident or if the vehicle has Curtain airbags been stolen or broken into, have the Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, airbag systems checked. as this could cause head injuries when All work on the airbag systems must the curtain airbag is deployed. be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the a qualified workshop. grab handles installed on the roof, they Even if all of the precautions mentioned play a part in securing the curtain airbags. are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

111 Safety

Lateral airbags General points relating to Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and Use only approved covers on the seats, child seats tightened correctly. compatible with the deployment of the For child seats with a support leg, ensure lateral airbags. For information on the that the support leg is in firm and steady The regulations on carrying children are product range of seat covers suitable for contact with the floor. specific to each country. Refer to the your vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer. At the front: if necessary, adjust the legislation in force in your country. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat passenger seat. backrests (clothes, etc.) as this could At the rear: if necessary, adjust the cause injuries to the thorax or arm when For maximum safety, please observe the relevant front seat. the lateral airbag is deployed. following recommendations: Do not sit with the upper part of the body - In accordance with European regulations, any nearer to the door than necessary. all children under the age of 12 or less The vehicle's front door panels include Remove and stow the head restraint than one and a half metres tall must side impact sensors. before installing a child seat with backrest travel in approved child seats suited to A damaged door or any unauthorised or on a passenger seat. their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt Refit the head restraint once the child seat incorrectly executed work (modification or or ISOFIX mountings. repair) on the front doors or their interior has been removed. - Statistically, the safest seats in your trim could compromise the operation of vehicle for carrying children are the rear these sensors – risk of malfunction of the seats. lateral airbags! - A child weighing less than 9 kg must Child seat at the rear Such work must only be done by travel in the rearward facing position a CITROËN dealer or a qualified "Rearward facing" both in the front and in the rear. workshop.

It is recommended that children travel on When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed the rear seats of your vehicle: on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's - "rearward facing" up to the age of 3, front seat forward and straighten the backrest - "forward facing" over the age of 3. so that the "rearward facing" child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.

112 Safety "Forward facing" Child seat at the front "Rearward facing"

When a "forward facing" child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed so that the legs of the child in the "forward on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's Passenger seat adjusted into the intermediate and lowest position, with the backrest front seat. longitudinal and lowest position, then the straightened. Then pull the booster/height booster/height adjuster control pulled 11 times. 3rd row seats adjuster control 11 times.

The front passenger airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks Deactivating the front 5 being seriously injured or killed in case passenger airbag When a child seat is installed on a rear of airbag deployment. passenger seat in the 3rd row, move the Never install a "rearward facing" child seats in the 2nd row forward and straighten the restraint system on a seat protected by an backrest so that the child seat and the child's "Forward facing" active front airbag. This could cause the legs do not touch the seat in the 2nd row. death of the child or serious injury. A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on a rear passenger seat in the 3rd row,

When a "forward facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal and lowest position, with the backrest straightened. Then pull the booster/ height adjuster control 11 times. Leave the passenger's airbag active. 113 Safety

Passenger airbag deactivation To ensure the safety of your child, the front switch passenger airbag must be deactivated when you install a "rearward facing" child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.

Reactivating the front passenger The warning label present on both sides of the airbag passenger sun visor repeats this advice. When you remove the "rearward facing" child In line with current legislation, you will find this seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to warning in all the required languages in the the ON position to reactivate the airbag and so following tables. assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact. Only the front passenger airbag can be deactivated. When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the Passenger airbag OFF F With the ignition off, insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch. instrument panel, for approximately F Turn it to the OFF position. one minute to signal that the front F Remove the key keeping the switch in the airbag is activated. new position.

When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. It stays on while the airbag is deactivated.

114 Safety

AR НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини BG СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето. NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí CS nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ. Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT DA KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT. Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, DE das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden. Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από EL ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the EN CHILD can occur. NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un ES AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño. 5 Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja ET avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada. ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen FI laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN. NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE FR frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT. NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi HR moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta. SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez HU a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja. NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale IT ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino. NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO LT PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.

115 Safety

NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA LV SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS. MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de NL airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, NO BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ PL POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA. NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. PT Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG RO frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, RU защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM. SK Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA. NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem SL AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE. NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu SR nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att SV DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya TR ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.

116 Safety

Recommended child seats Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg Range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three-point seat belt.

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L5 "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt. Is only installed on the outer rear seats. L1 The head restraint on the vehicle seat must "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" be removed. 5 Is installed in the "rearward facing" position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L6 "GRACO Booster" The child is restrained by the seat belt. Is only installed on the front passenger seat or on the outer rear seats.

117 Safety

Installing a child seat attached with the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child/indicative age

Groups 0 (b) and 0+) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Seat position Birth to 13 kg 9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg

Front passenger seat (c)

1st row - fixed U U U U

- height adjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)

Fixed outer rear seats and centre rear seat (d) 2nd row U U U U Longitudinally-adjustable outer rear seats (d) (e)

3rd row Outer rear seats U U U U

(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant (c) Refer to the current legislation in your be installed in all vehicles using the car seats and "car cots" cannot be country before installing your child on seat belt. installed on the front passenger seat or this seat. in the 3rd row. When installed in the 2nd row, they may prevent the use of the other seats.

118 Safety

(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat, "ISOFIX" mountings rearward facing or forward facing, move the front seat forward, then Your vehicle has been approved in accordance straighten the backrest to allow enough with the latest ISOFIX regulations. space for the child seat and the child's The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX legs. compliant mountings: (e) To install a child seat on a rear seat, rearward facing or forward facing, adjust the rear seat to the fully back position with the backrest straightened. U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt - a ring B, located under a cover on the back and universally approved, rearward of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as and/or forward facing, with the front the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap. seat which must be adjusted in the Its position is indicated by a marking. intermediate longitudinal position. Located on the back of the seat backrest, the There are three rings for each seat: U(R): as with U, with the passenger seat TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper strap 5 that must be adjusted to the low of child seats that have one. This device limits position with 11 actions on the seat forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of height control and in the intermediate a front impact. longitudinal position. This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle. The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are easily secured on the two rings A. Some also have an upper strap which is attached to ring B. - two rings A, located between the vehicle's seat backrest and cushion, indicated by To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: a marking, - remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on the seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed),

119 Safety

- detach the TOP TETHER cover by pulling RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX Baby P2C Mini and its ISOFIX base its cut-out, base (size categories: C, D, E) - pass the upper strap of the child seat over (size category: E) the seat backrest, centring it between the openings for the head restraint rods, Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg - fix the hook of the upper strap to ring B, - tighten the upper strap.

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the protection of the child in the event of an accident. Strictly observe the fitting instructions provided with the child seat.

Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to rings A. For information on the possibilities for base which is attached to rings A. The base has a height adjustable support leg installing ISOFIX child seats in your The base has a height adjustable support leg that rests on the vehicle's floor. vehicle, refer to the summary table. that rests on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be secured with a This child seat can also be secured with seat belt. a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used In this case, only the shell is used and must and must be attached to the vehicle seat be attached to the vehicle seat using the using the three-point seat belt. Recommended ISOFIX child three-point seat belt. seats

Also consult the user guide from the child seat's manufacturer to find out how to install and remove the seat.

120 Safety

Summary tables of locations for Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size ISOFIX child seats classes: D, C, A, B, B1) In line with European regulations, these tables indicate the options for installing ISOFIX child Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to rings A. 5 The base has a height adjustable support leg that rests on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be used "forward facing". This child seat cannot be secured with a seat belt. We recommend that you use the seat in the "rearward facing" position up to the age of 3 years.

121 Safety

Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg (group 0) (group 0) 9-18 kg (group 1) Under 13 kg Up to about From about 1 to 3 years old (group 0+) 6 months Up to about 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing

ISOFIX size category FGCDECD A B B1

Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX

Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU X IUF, IL-SU

Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU (1) IUF/IL-SU seats

Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be IUF: seat suitable for the installation of X: seat not suitable for the installation of installed on the front passenger seat. an ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward a child seat or infant car seat for the facing" secured using the upper strap weight group indicated. ** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the on the upper ring of ISOFIX seating lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all (1): the outer row 2 seat must be adjusted positions. of the space on the rear bench seat. to the maximum forward position minus IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of 3 notches. an sofix emi- niversal seat which I S U For more information on the ISOFIX can be: mountings and in particular the upper strap, - "rearward facing" fitted with an refer to the corresponding section. upper strap or a support leg, - "forward facing" fitted with a support leg, or - an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.

122 Safety

Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg (group 0) (group 0) 9-18 kg (group 1) Under 13 kg Up to about From about 1 to 3 years old (group 0+) 6 months Up to about 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat* rearward facing rearward facing forward facing

ISOFIX size category FGCDECD A B B1

Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX

Fixed rear outer seats IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

Longitudinally-adjustable rear outer IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU seats 5 Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

3rd row rear seat Not ISOFIX

* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an X: seat not suitable for the installation of installed on the front passenger seat. ISOFIX Universal seat, "Forward facing" a child seat or infant car seat for the secured using the upper strap on the weight group indicated. ** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured to the upper ring of ISOFIX seating positions. lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies all For more information on the ISOFIX mountings IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an of the space on the rear bench seat. and in particular the upper strap, refer to the Isofix Semi-Universal seat which can corresponding section. be: - "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg, - "forward facing" fitted with a support leg, or - an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. 123 Safety

Child lock Advice Children at the rear This mechanical system prevents opening of At rear seating positions, always leave a rear door using its interior control. The incorrect installation of a child seat in sufficient space between the front seat The control is located on the edge of each rear a vehicle compromises the protection of and: door and locking is independent for each door. the child in the event of an accident. - a "rearward facing" child seat, Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat - the child's feet for a child seat fitted belt buckle under the child seat, as this "forward facing". could destabilise it. To do this, move the front seat forwards Remember to fasten the seat belts or the and, if necessary, straighten its backrest. Locking child seat harnesses keeping the slack For optimal installation of the "forward relative to the child's body to a minimum, facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is even for short journeys. as close as possible to the backrest of the When installing a child seat using the seat vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it. belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is Children at the front The legislation on carrying children on the adjustable, move it forwards if necessary. front passenger seat is specific to each The head restraint must be removed country. Refer to the legislation in force in before installing a child seat with the country in which you are driving. a backrest on a passenger seat. Deactivate the front passenger airbag Ensure that the head restraint is stored or F Using the integral ignition key, turn the when a "rearward facing" child seat is attached securely to prevent it from being control as far as it will go: installed on the front passenger seats. thrown around the vehicle in the event - to the left on the left-hand rear door, Otherwise, there is a risk of serious or of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint - to the right on the right-hand rear door. fatal injury to the child if the airbag is when the child seat is removed. deployed. Unlocking F Using the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go: - to the right on the left-hand rear door, - to the left on the right-hand rear door.

124 Safety

Installing a booster seat The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs. We recommend using a booster seat with a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at shoulder level.

Additional protections To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. 5 To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. As a safety precaution, do not leave: - a child or children alone and unattended in a vehicle, - a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

125 Driving Driving advice Important! Observe driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Never drive with the parking brake applied Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your – Risk of overheating and damage to the hands on the wheel so that you are ready to braking system! react at any time to any eventuality. As the exhaust system of your vehicle As a safety measure, the driver should only is very hot, even several minutes after If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road: carry out any operations that require close switching off the engine, never park or run - check that the depth of water does not attention when the vehicle is stationary. the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that On a long journey, taking a break every two grass, fallen leaves, etc.) – Risk of fire! might be generated by other users, hours is strongly recommended. - deactivate the Stop & Start function, In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate - drive as slowly as possible without stalling. the need to brake and increase the distance In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), from other vehicles. - do not stop and do not switch off the engine. Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads. Never leave the engine running in the parking brake and put the gearbox into If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact an enclosed area without adequate neutral or position N or P, depending on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. ventilation: internal combustion engines the type of gearbox. emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and death! In very severe wintry conditions Driving on flooded roads (temperatures below -23°C), to guarantee We strongly advise against driving on flooded correct operation and the longevity of roads, as this could cause serious damage the mechanical elements of your vehicle to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the (engine and gearbox), the engine must be electrical systems of your vehicle. left running for 4 minutes before driving.

126 Driving

In case of towing New vehicle Anti-theft protection Do not pull a trailer before having driven at least Driving with a trailer places greater approximately 620 miles (1,000 kilometres). Electronic immobiliser demands on the towing vehicle and The keys contain an electronic chip which has requires extra care from the driver. a secret code. When the ignition is switched Braking on, this code must be recognised in order for Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. starting to be possible. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of This electronic engine immobiliser locks the Side wind engine braking is recommended. engine management system a few moments F Take into account the increased sensitivity after the ignition is switched off, and prevents to wind. Tyres starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key. F Check the tyre pressures of the towing Cooling In the event of a malfunction, you are informed vehicle and of the trailer, observing the by a message in the instrument panel screen. Towing a trailer on a slope increases the recommended pressures. If this happens, your vehicle will not start; temperature of the coolant. contact a CITROËN dealer if required. As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling Lighting capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. F To lower the engine speed, reduce your F Check the electrical lighting and signalling Starting/switching off speed. on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. the engine using the 6 The maximum towable load on an incline depends on the gradient and the exterior electronic key temperature. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant Starting the engine temperature. For more information on Headlamp adjustment, refer to the corresponding section. F If this warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off Certain driving or manoeuvring aid the engine as soon as possible. functions are automatically disabled if an approved towing system is used.

127 Driving

F Place the gear selector at P or N for If one of the starting conditions is not met, If the vehicle is not immobilised, the vehicles with an automatic gearbox or a reminder message is displayed in the engine will not stop. neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. instrument panel. In some circumstances, it is F Place the electronic key in the reader. necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly F Press the brake pedal for vehicles with an while pressing the "START/STOP" button to Switching off the engine leads to a loss of automatic gearbox, or fully depress the assist unlocking of the steering; a message braking assistance. clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual warns you when this is needed. gearbox. F Briefly press the "START/STOP" button. With petrol engines, after a cold start, Emergency switch-off The steering column unlocks and the engine preheating the catalytic converter can In the event of an emergency only, the engine starts more or less instantly. cause noticeable engine vibrations for can be switched off without conditions (even On certain versions with the automatic gearbox anything up to 2 minutes while stationary when driving). (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not with the engine running (accelerated idle Press the "START/STOP" button for about lock. speed). three seconds. In this case, the steering column locks as soon For Diesel vehicles, in sub-zero temperatures as the vehicle stops. the engine will not start until the pre-heater On certain versions with the automatic gearbox warning lamp has gone off. Switching off the engine (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not F Immobilise the vehicle. lock. F Place the gear selector at P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or Electronic key left in the reader If this warning lamp comes on after neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. You will be warned by a message if the pressing the "START/STOP" button, F Press the "START/STOP" button. electronic key is still in the reader on press down on the brake or clutch The engine stops and the steering column opening the driver's door. pedal until the warning lamp goes locks. off, without pressing the "START/ On certain versions with the automatic gearbox STOP" button again, until the engine (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not starts and runs. lock.

F Remove the electronic key from the reader.

128 Driving

F With an automatic gearbox, you should The ​Keyless Entry and Starting electronic Starting/switching off the keep the brake pedal fully depressed and key must be inside the vehicle. engine with Keyless Entry not press the "START/STOP" button again If the electronic key is not detected in this until the engine is running. and Starting zone, a message is displayed. Starting the engine Move the electronic key into this zone so If one of the starting conditions is not met, that the engine can be started. a reminder message is displayed in the If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key instrument panel. not detected – Back-up starting" section. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of the steering column.

F Press the "START/STOP" button while maintaining pressure on the pedal until the With petrol engines, after a cold start, engine starts. preheating the catalytic converter can The steering column unlocks and the engine cause noticeable engine vibrations for F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever starts. up to 2 minutes while stationary with the into neutral. On certain versions with the automatic gearbox engine running (accelerated idle speed). F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not fully depress the clutch pedal. lock. 6 or For Diesel engines, when the temperature is F With an , place the gear automatic gearbox negative and/or the engine is cold, the start As a safety measure, never leave the selector in mode or . P N will only take place once the preheater warning vehicle while the engine is running. F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, lamp is off. press the brake pedal. If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the "START/STOP" button: Switching off the engine F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle. F With a manual gearbox, you should keep F With a manual gearbox, preferably put the the clutch pedal fully depressed and not gear lever into neutral. press the "START/STOP" button again until the engine is running.

129 Driving F With an automatic gearbox, preferably Key not detected Back-up switch-off select mode P or N. Back-up starting F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, press the "START/STOP" button. The engine stops and the steering column locks. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel to lock the steering column. On certain versions with the automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P.

When the electronic key is not detected or is When the electronic key is in the recognition no longer in the recognition zone, a message zone and after pressing the "START/STOP" appears in the instrument panel when closing button, the engine does not start: a door or trying to switch off the engine. If the vehicle is not immobilised, the F Place the gear selector at P or N for engine will not stop. vehicles with an automatic gearbox or F To confirm the instruction to switch off the neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. engine, press the "START/STOP" button for F Place the electronic key in the back-up about three seconds. Never leave your vehicle with the reader. In the event of a fault with the electronic key, electronic key still inside. F Press the brake pedal on vehicles with an contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified automatic gearbox, or fully depress the workshop. clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. Switching off the engine leads to a loss of F Press the "START/STOP" button. braking assistance. The engine starts. Emergency switch-off In the event of an emergency only, the engine can be switched off without conditions (even when driving). Press the "START/STOP" button for about three seconds. In this case, the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.

130 Driving

On certain versions with the automatic gearbox It goes off to confirm the release of the parking (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not Electric parking brake brake. lock. The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes during manual application or release. After applying the parking brake, the Switching the ignition on simultaneous flashing of the indicator lamps (without starting) in the instrument panel and in the control lever With the electronic key in the reader or the warns you to secure the immobilisation of the The system provides, in automatic operation, Keyless Entry and Starting key inside the vehicle by engaging a gear (with a manual the application of the parking brake on vehicle, pressing the "START/STOP" button, gearbox or by placing the selector at position switching off the engine and release as the with no action on the pedals, allows the P with an automatic gearbox or by placing vehicle moves off. ignition to be switched on. a chock against one of the wheels (e.g. parking The driver can take over at any time to apply on a very steep slope or a steep slope with F Press the "START/STOP" button, the or release the parking brake, by operating the a weak battery). instrument panel comes on but the engine control lever: does not start. - by briefly pulling the control lever to apply F Press the button again to switch off the the brake, ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. - by briefly pushing the control lever, while pressing the brake pedal, to release it. In the event of a battery failure, the Automatic mode is activated by default. electric parking brake no longer works. As a safety measure, if the parking brake 6 With the ignition on, the system is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by automatically changes to energy economy engaging a gear (with a manual gearbox) mode when required to maintain an or placing a chock against one of the adequate state of charge of the battery. The technology adopted for the electric wheels. parking brake does not allow the fitment of Call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified 15-inch wheels. workshop.

Indicator lamp This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and in the control lever to confirm the application of the parking brake. 131 Driving

Label on door panel When towing, parking on a steep slope, Manual application or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn With the vehicle stationary: the wheels towards the kerb and engage F pull briefly on the control lever. a gear (with a manual gearbox) or place Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by the gear selector at position P with an flashing of the indicator lamp in the control automatic gearbox. lever. For towing, you vehicle is approved for Application of the parking brake is confirmed parking on slopes of up to 12%. by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake applied". Before leaving the vehicle, check that the parking brake is applied: the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the Manual operation Automatic operation control lever must be on fixed. Manual release If the parking brake is not applied, there Automatic release is an audible signal and a message is With the ignition on or the engine running, to displayed on opening the driver's door. release the parking brake: Ensure first that the engine is running and the F press the brake pedal, driver's door is properly closed. F while maintaining pressure on the brake The electric parking brake releases pedal, briefly push the control lever. automatically and progressively when the The complete release of the parking brake is vehicle moves off. Never leave a child alone inside the confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could With a manual gearbox P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, release the parking brake. F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1st accompanied by the display of the message gear or reverse. "Parking brake released". F Press the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal.

If you push the control lever without With an automatic gearbox pressing the brake pedal, the parking F Press the brake pedal. brake will not be released and a message F Release the brake pedal and press the is displayed. accelerator pedal.

132 Driving

Immobilisation of the vehicle with the With an automatic gearbox, if the brake With automatic operation, you can also parking brake released does not release automatically, check that manually apply or release the parking F Switch off the engine. the front doors are correctly closed. brake at any time using the control lever. Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the The complete release of the parking brake is Special cases control lever. confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the F Switch on the ignition again, without starting P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, In some situations, you may need to operate the engine. accompanied by the display of the message the parking brake manually. F Release the parking brake manually by "Parking brake released". pushing the control lever while keeping your Immobilisation of the vehicle foot on the brake pedal. When stationary with the engine running, do not with the engine running The complete release of the parking brake is depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, To immobilise the vehicle with the engine confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the you risk releasing the parking brake. running, briefly pull the control lever. P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, Application of the parking brake is confirmed accompanied by the display of the message Automatic application by illumination of the brake indicator lamp "Parking brake released". and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake F Switch off the ignition. is automatically applied when the engine is accompanied by the display of the message switched off. "Parking brake applied". 6 Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp Deactivating automatic operation and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, Parking the vehicle with the accompanied by the display of the message brake released In some situations, for example when it is "Parking brake applied". extremely cold or during towing (caravan, recovery), it may be necessary to deactivate In very cold conditions (ice), it is automatic operation of the system. Automatic application does not take place recommended that the parking brake not if the engine stalls or goes into STOP be applied. F Start the engine. mode of Stop & Start. To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear F Apply the parking brake with the control or fit the chocks against one of the wheels. lever, if it is released.

133 Driving

F Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. In the event of a failure of the main service This system only operates when: F Push and hold the control lever in the brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver - the vehicle is completely stationary, with release direction for at least 10 seconds and taken ill, under instruction, etc.), a continuous your foot on the brake pedal, no more than 15 seconds. pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle. - certain slope conditions are met, F Release the control lever. Braking takes place while the control lever is - the driver's door is closed. F Press and hold the brake pedal. being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever The hill start assist system cannot be F Pull the control lever in the application is released. deactivated. direction for 2 seconds. The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of the vehicle during emergency braking. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being If the emergency braking malfunctions, held temporarily by hill start assist. the message "Parking brake fault" will be If you need to get out of the vehicle with Deactivation of the automatic displayed. functions is confirmed by the engine running, apply the parking illumination of this indicator lamp in brake manually. Then verify that the the instrument panel. parking brake warning lamp (and the warning lamp P on the electric parking F Release the control lever and the brake brake control lever) are on continuously. pedal. If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction, signalled by the illumination of one or both From now on, the parking brake can only warning lamps in the instrument panel, then be applied and released manually using the stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. control lever. In this event, stability must be assured by the Operation Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" operation. actions on the control lever until the vehicle is Reactivation of automatic operation is immobilised. confirmed by the indicator lamp in the instrument panel going off. Hill start assist Emergency braking System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the The emergency braking should only be starting on a gradient, the time it takes to vehicle is held for a short time when you used in an exceptional situation. move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. release the brake pedal: - provided you are in first gear or neutral with a manual gearbox. 134 Driving

- provided you are in mode D or M with an automatic gearbox. 5-speed manual gearbox 6-speed manual gearbox Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear

F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.

Failure to follow this advice could cause permanent damage to the gearbox (inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and gear). reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a short time when you release the brake pedal. Engaging reverse gear F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the Operating fault gear lever in neutral. F Move the gear lever to the right then pull it If a fault in the system occurs, these warning back. 6 lamps come on, accompanied by an alert message. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system Only engage reverse gear when the checked. vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, F Raise the ring under the knob and move the - press the clutch pedal. gear lever to the left then forwards.

135 Driving

P. Park. Only engage reverse gear when the To move the selector, switch on the - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. ignition or start the engine. brake applied or released. When the battery charge is too low, it will - Starting the engine. not be possible to move the selector. As a safety precaution and to facilitate R. Reverse. starting the engine: - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle - always select neutral, stationary, engine at idle. - press the clutch pedal. N. Neutral. Steering mounted controls - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake applied. Automatic gearbox - Starting the engine. D. Automatic operation. Six or eight-speed automatic gearbox with M. Manual operation with sequential steering wheel-mounted selector. It also offers changing of the gears. a manual mode with gear changes via steering mounted paddles located behind the steering wheel. To come out of position P, shift the selector to the right to the required position, while pressing the brake pedal to +. Control paddle to change up, to the right the floor. of the steering wheel. Gear selector F Pull the "+" control paddle towards you to change up. To select position P, move the selector to the uppermost position (towards R), then -. Control paddle to change down, to the left push it forwards, then to the left. of the steering wheel. Only engage it when the vehicle is completely stationary. In this position, the F Pull the "-" control paddle towards you to front wheels are locked. Ensure that the change down. selector is positioned correctly. The steering mounted paddles do not allow neutral to be selected, nor reverse gear to be engaged or disengaged.

136 Driving

F If the parking brake is released, the vehicle Displays on the instrument panel If these conditions are not met, an audible moves off. signal is issued together with a message. If the parking brake is applied and automatic mode is activated, accelerate gradually.

If P is displayed on the instrument panel but the gear selector is in another position, If the parking brake does not release move the selector to position P to allow automatically, check that the front doors the engine to be started. are properly closed.

F With the engine running, press the brake pedal. Never press the brake and accelerator pedals at the same time. Braking or F Select automatic mode (position D), accelerating must be done with the When you move the selector, the indicator sequential mode (position M) or reverse right foot only. Pressing the two pedals corresponding to its position is displayed on the (position R). simultaneously risks damaging the instrument panel. gearbox. P. Parking. If you do not press the brake R. Reverse. pedal when trying to move N. Neutral. the gear selector out of If position R, D or M is selected when the D. Drive (Automatic operation). position P, this warning lamp 6 or this symbol appears on engine is running at idle, with the brakes 1 to 6 or 8. Gears engaged during manual the instrument panel with the released, the vehicle moves even without operation. message "Shift automatic the accelerator being pressed. -. Invalid value during manual gearbox to P", the P symbol operation. flashes and a beep sounds. Never leave children unattended in the Starting the vehicle vehicle when the engine is running. When carrying out maintenance with the F With your foot on the brake pedal, select F Check that the display on the instrument engine running, apply the parking brake position P or N. panel agrees with the position engaged. and select position P. F Start the engine. F Gradually release the brake pedal.

137 Driving

Never select position N while the vehicle Automatic mode Temporary control of gear changing is moving. If position N is selected by F Select position D. mistake while driving, allow the engine to return to idle, then select position D to accelerate. D and the gear engaged appear in the instrument panel. Never select position P or R unless the The gearbox operates in auto-adaptive mode, vehicle is completely stationary. without any action by the driver. It continuously If you wish to engage reverse gear, selects the gear best suited to the following to prevent jolting, do not accelerate parameters: immediately after selecting R. - optimisation of fuel consumption, You can temporarily take control of gear Selection of position R is accompanied by - style of driving, changes using the steering mounted control the sound of a beep. - road conditions, paddles "+" and "-". The gear change - vehicle load. instruction is acted on if the engine speed For maximum acceleration without touching permits. the selector, press the accelerator fully down This function allows you to anticipate certain (kick-down). The gearbox changes down situations, such as overtaking another vehicle automatically or holds the gear selected until or approaching a bend in the road. In the event of a battery failure, you the maximum engine speed is reached. After a few moments with no action on the must place the chocks supplied with the When braking, the gearbox changes down control paddles, the gearbox returns to vehicle tools against one of the wheels to automatically to provide effective engine automatic operation. immobilise the vehicle. braking. If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear for Manual mode If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, safety reasons. F Select position M. never try to start the engine by pushing F Use the steering mounted control paddles the vehicle. "+" and "-" to change gears. The gears engaged are displayed in sequence in the instrument panel. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox automatically selects gear 1.

138 Driving

In sequential mode, it is not necessary to door is opened or approximately 45 seconds Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed release the accelerator pedal when changing after the ignition is switched off, an audible restrictions permitting. gear. signal sounds and a message appears: Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or Changing from one gear to another only F reposition the lever to position P; the a qualified workshop. occurs if the vehicle speed and engine speed audible signal stops and the message conditions allow; otherwise the gearbox will disappears. operate temporarily in automatic mode. Whatever the parking circumstances, you must Gear efficiency indicator If the engine speed is too low or too high, the apply the parking brake manually to immobilise This system reduces fuel consumption by gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the vehicle if automatic operation has been recommending the most appropriate gear. the gear actually engaged is displayed. deactivated.

Operation In all circumstances, ensure that the Invalid value during manual operation selector is in position P before leaving Depending on the driving situation and your your vehicle. vehicle's equipment, the system may advise This symbol is displayed if a gear you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can is not engaged correctly (selector follow this instruction without engaging the between two positions). In the event of a battery failure, use the intermediate gears. chock to immobilise your vehicle. Gear efficiency recommendations are for information only. In fact, the road layout, the You can change mode at any time by traffic density and safety remain the deciding 6 moving the gear selector from D to M or factors when choosing the best gear. The driver vice versa. Operating fault therefore remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the indications issued If the gearbox malfunctions, the by the system. Stopping the vehicle Service warning lamp comes on in This function cannot be deactivated. the instrument panel, accompanied Before switching off the engine, you can by a message and an audible signal. engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral. In both cases, apply the parking In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may then programmed to automatic mode. With an automatic gearbox, the system is feel a substantial jolt when changing from P to If the lever is not in position P, when the driver's only active in manual mode. R and from N to R. This jolt will not cause any damage to the gearbox. 139 Driving

The information appears in the Operation For your convenience, during parking instrument panel in the form of an manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available arrow. Going into engine STOP mode for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear. With a manual gearbox, the arrow may be The Stop & Start system does not modify accompanied by the gear recommended. This indicator lamp comes on in the the vehicle's functions, such as, for This arrow may be pointing up or down, instrument panel and the engine example, braking, power steering, etc. depending on the context. goes into standby automatically.

- With a manual gearbox, at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), or with the vehicle The system adapts its gear efficiency stationary (with the PureTech 110, 130 and Never refuel with the engine in STOP recommendation according to the driving BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), when you place mode; you must switch off the ignition with conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the the gear lever in neutral and you release the the "START/STOP" button. driver's requirements (power, acceleration, clutch pedal, braking, etc.). - With an automatic gearbox, at speeds The system never suggests: below 2 mph (3 km/h), or when the vehicle - engaging first gear, Special cases: STOP mode not is stationary (depending on version), when available - engaging reverse gear. you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector into position N. STOP mode is not invoked when: If your vehicle is fitted with this system, a time - the driver's door is open, Stop & Start counter calculates the sum of the periods in - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph reduces fuel consumption and exhaust every time the ignition is switched on with the (10 km/h) since the last engine start using emissions as well as the noise level when "START/STOP" button. the "START/STOP" button, stationary. - the electric parking brake is applied or being applied, The Stop & Start system puts the engine - the engine is needed to maintain temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during a comfortable temperature in the passenger stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or compartment, other, etc.). The engine restarts automatically – - demisting is active, START mode – as soon as you wish to move off again. Restarting occurs instantaneously, quickly and silently. 140 Driving

- certain special conditions (battery charge, Special cases: START mode The system can be deactivated at any time, engine temperature, braking assistance, activated automatically once the ignition is switched on. exterior temperature, etc.) where the engine If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts. START mode is activated automatically if: is needed for control of the system. The Stop & Start system is reactivated - you open the driver's door, automatically every time the ignition is switched - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, on. In this case, this indicator lamp - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h) with a manual gearbox (2 mph flashes for a few seconds then goes The Stop & Start is deactivated in the Driving off. (3 km/h) with PureTech 110, 130, THP 165, menu of the touch screen. 180 and BlueHDi 100, 130 versions), 2 mph Select "Stop & Start" to deactivate the system. This operation is perfectly normal. (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox, - the electric parking brake is being applied, - certain specific conditions (battery charge, It is indicated by this warning lamp engine temperature, braking assistance, coming on. Going into engine START mode air conditioning setting, etc.) where the engine is needed for control of the system This indicator lamp goes off and the or vehicle. Select "Stop & Start" again to reactivate the engine restarts automatically. function.

- With a manual gearbox, when you fully It is indicated by this indicator lamp depress the clutch pedal. coming on. - With an automatic gearbox: 6 In this case, this indicator lamp • gear selector in position D or M, when Use of the adaptive cruise control you release the brake pedal, flashes for a few seconds, then goes off. deactivates the Stop & Start function. • or gear selector in position N and brake pedal released, when you place the gear This operation is perfectly normal. selector in position D or M, • or when you engage reverse gear. Deactivation/Manual Operating fault reactivation If the system fails, this warning lamp In certain circumstances, such as to flashes for a few seconds before maintain the temperature in the passenger lighting up continuously, associated compartment, it may be necessary to with a message. deactivate the Stop & Start system. 141 Driving

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or Driving on flooded roads The under-inflation detection system does a qualified workshop. Before driving in a flooded area, it is not replace the need for vigilance on the If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the engine may strongly recommended that you deactivate part of the driver. stall. the Stop & Start system. This system does not avoid the need to All of the instrument panel warning lamps come For more information on Driving advice, check the tyre pressures (including the on. particularly on flooded roads, refer to the spare wheel) every month as well as Depending on version, an alert message may also corresponding section. before a long journey. be displayed, asking you to place the gear lever in Driving with under-inflated tyres worsens position N and press the brake pedal. road-holding, lengthens braking distances, It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and causes premature wear of the tyres, start the engine again using the "START/STOP" particularly in adverse conditions (heavy button. Tyre under-inflation loads, high speeds, long journeys). The Stop & Start requires the use of detection a 12 V battery of special specification and System which automatically checks the technology. pressures of the tyres while driving. All work on this type of battery must be Driving with under-inflated tyres carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or The system monitors the pressure of the four increases fuel consumption. a qualified workshop. tyres when the vehicle is moving. For more information on the 12 V battery, It compares the information given by the refer to the corresponding section. wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised after every tyre The inflation pressures defined for your pressure adjustment or wheel change. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure The system triggers an alert as soon as it label. detects a drop in the pressure of one or more For more information on the Opening the bonnet tyres. Identification markings, refer to the corresponding section.

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode.

142 Driving

F If it is not possible to make this check Checking tyre pressures Snow chains immediately, drive carefully at reduced This check should be done when the tyres The system does not have to be speed. are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or reinitialised after fitting or removing snow or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) chains. F In case of a puncture, use the temporary at moderate speeds). puncture repair kit or the spare wheel Otherwise, add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the (depending on equipment). Reinitialisation of the system is done on the values indicated on the label. touch screen, with the ignition on and the The alert is kept active until the system is vehicle stationary. reinitialised. F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving functions" tab, then "Under-inflation Under-inflation alert initialisation". This is indicated by continuous Reinitialisation F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", illumination of this warning lamp, The system must be reinitialised after any an audible signal and a message confirm an audible signal and, depending adjustment to the pressures of one or more the reinitialisation. on equipment, the display of tyres, and after changing one or more wheels. The new pressure parameters saved are a message. treated as reference values by the system. F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking. F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do Malfunction 6 so. Before reinitialising the system, ensure that the pressures of the four tyres The loss of pressure detected does not are correct for the conditions of use always cause visible bulging of the tyre. of the vehicle and conform to the The flashing and then fixed illumination of the Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual recommendations on the tyre pressure under-inflation warning lamp accompanied check. label. by illumination of the Service warning lamp The under-inflation alert can only be relied indicates a fault with the system. on if the reinitialisation of the system has A message appears, accompanied by an F If you have a compressor, such as the one been done with the pressures in the four audible signal. in the temporary puncture repair kit, check tyres correctly adjusted. In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the the pressures of the four tyres when cold. The under-inflation detection system tyres is no longer provided. does not give a warning if a pressure is Have the system checked by a CITROËN incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. dealer or a qualified workshop. 143 Driving

After carrying out any work on the system, Speed Limit recognition the pressure of the four tyres must be and recommendation checked and the system reinitialised.

Memorising speeds This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the F speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) Select the system for which you want to or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising memorise new speed settings. This system allows the speed limit detected by speed). F Press the button corresponding to the the camera to be displayed in the instrument You can memorise up to six speed settings speed setting you want to modify. panel. for each of the two systems. By default, some The system also processes speed limit speed settings are already memorised. F Enter the new value using the numerical keypad and confirm. information from the navigation system mapping. Memorisation As a safety measure, the driver must carry You should update your navigation This function can be accessed in the Driving out these operations when stationary. mapping regularly in order to receive menu of the touch screen. accurate speed limit information from the F Select the "Driving functions" tab then system. Adjusting Speeds.

Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. The display of the speed limit in the instrument panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign intended for cars (light vehicles).

144 Driving

The speed limit units (mph or km/h) To maintain correct operation of the depend on the country you are driving in. system: regularly clean the area in front of This should be taken into account in order the camera. to observe the speed limit. The internal surface of the windscreen can The system is active but is not detecting speed For the system to operate correctly when also become misted around the camera. limit information. you change country, the units for speed in In humid and cold weather, demist the the instrument panel must be those for the windscreen regularly. country you are driving in.

Activation/Deactivation On detection of speed limit information, the Activation and deactivation of the system is system displays the value. The automatic reading of road signs is done in the touch screen's Driving menu. a driving assistance system and does not Select the "Vehicle settings" tab, then always display speed limits correctly. "Security"/"Safety" and "Recommended Operating limits The speed limit signs present on the road speed display". The legislation on speed limits is specific to always take priority over the display by the each country. system. Displays in the instrument panel The system does not take account of reduced The system cannot in any circumstances speed limits in the following cases: replace the need for vigilance on the part - poor weather (rain, snow), of the driver. 6 - atmospheric pollution, The driver must observe the driving - when towing, regulations and must adapt the speed of - driving with a space-saver type spare wheel the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic. or snow chains fitted, The system may not display the speed - puncture repair using the temporary repair limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign kit, within a preset period. - young drivers, etc. The system is designed to detect signs that conform to the Vienna Convention on The following situations may interfere with road signs. the operation of the system or prevent it from 1. Detected speed limit indication. working: or - poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, 2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. falling snow, rain, fog),

145 Driving

- windscreen area located in front of the Steering mounted controls Memorising the speed camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow- covered, damaged or covered by a sticker, - fault with the camera, - obsolete or incorrect mapping, - obstructed road signs (by other vehicles, F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. vegetation, snow), Speed limiter/cruise control information is - speed limit signs that do not conform to the displayed. standard, are damaged or distorted. On detection of a sign offering a new speed 1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. limit, the system displays the value and MEM 2. Memorise a speed setting. flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it a new speed setting. Recommendation Display in the instrument panel

If there is a difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h) between the speed setting and the speed displayed by the Speed Limit In addition to Speed Limit recognition and recognition and recommendation, the recommendation, the driver can select the MEM symbol is not displayed. speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or cruise control memorisation button. Depending on the road conditions, several speeds may be displayed.

F Make an initial press on button 2 to request For more information on the Speed saving of the speed suggested. , or limiter Cruise control Adaptive 3. Speed limit indication. A message is displayed to confirm the request. cruise control, refer to the corresponding 4. Memorise the speed. sections. F Press button 2 again to confirm and save Current speed setting. 5. the new speed setting. After a predetermined period, the screen returns to the current display.

146 Driving Speed limiter "LIMIT" Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

Once the programmed speed limit is reached, additional pressure on the accelerator pedal has no effect. 1. Select speed limiter mode. Operation of the speed limiter requires 2. Decrease the programmed speed. a programmed speed of at least 19 mph 3. Increase the programmed speed. (30 km/h). 4. Speed limiter On/Pause. 6. Speed limiter on/off indicator. The speed limiter is paused using the control. Display the list of memorised speeds or Speed limiter mode selected. The programmed speed can be exceeded 5. 7. Use the speed suggested by the Speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly 8. Value of the speed setting. Limit recognition and recommendation beyond the point of resistance. system. To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the set Switching on/Pause For more information on Memorising speeds, speed limit has been reached again. refer to the corresponding section. F Turn wheel 1 to the LIMIT position: the 6 For more information on Speed Limit speed limiter mode is selected but is not recognition and recommendation and its switched on (Pause). memorisation, refer to the corresponding F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing The programmed speed remains in the system section. button 4, if the speed displayed is suitable memory when the ignition is switched off. (by default, the last speed programmed). F You can pause the speed limiter by pressing button 4 again: the display confirms that it The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, has been stopped (Pause). replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

147 Driving Adjusting the Speed Limit Temporarily exceeding the recognition and recommendation programmed speed setting F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, You do not have to switch the speed limiter on going beyond the point of resistance, to in order to set the speed. exceed the programmed speed limit. On sharp acceleration, as when The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily To modify the limit speed setting from the descending a steep hill, the speed limiter and the displayed programmed speed flashes. current speed of the vehicle: will not be able to prevent the vehicle from An audible signal accompanies the flashing F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make exceeding the programmed speed. of the programmed speed when exceeding successive short presses on button 2 or 3, An audible signal accompanies the the speed is not due to an action by the driver F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), flashing of the programmed speed when (steep hill, etc.). press and hold button 2 or 3. exceeding the speed is not due to an As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the action by the driver. To modify the limit speed setting using programmed value, the limiter operates again: The use of mats not approved by memorised speeds and from the touch screen: the display of the programmed speed becomes CITROËN may interfere with the operation F press button 5 to display the memorised steady again. of the speed limiter. speed settings, To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: F press the button for the desired speed - ensure that the mat is positioned setting. Switching off correctly, The selection screen closes after a few F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display - never fit one mat on top of another. moments. of information related to the speed limiter This setting becomes the new limit speed. disappears. To modify the limit speed setting from the speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit Malfunction recognition and recommendation: F the speed suggested is displayed in the Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the instrument panel, speed limiter. Cruise control "CRUISE" F make a first press on button 5; a message Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or is displayed to confirm the memorisation a qualified workshop. System which automatically request, maintains the speed of the vehicle F press button again to save the suggested 5 at the value programmed by the speed. driver, without any action on the The speed displays immediately in the accelerator pedal. instrument panel as the new speed setting. 148 Driving Operation of the cruise control requires Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel a vehicle speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h). As well as engagement: - of third gear or higher with a manual gearbox, - of second gear or higher in manual mode with an automatic gearbox, - of position D with an automatic gearbox. The cruise control is paused manually by pressing button 4 or pressing the brake pedal or if the ESC system is invoked for safety 1. Select cruise control mode. reasons. 2. Set the current speed as the cruise speed It is possible to exceed the programmed speed setting/Reduce the cruise speed setting. temporarily by depressing the accelerator 3. Set the current speed as the cruise speed 6. Cruise control pause/resume indication. pedal. setting/Increase the cruise speed setting. 7. Cruise control selection indication. To return to the programmed speed, simply 4. Pause/Resume cruise control. Value of the speed setting. release the accelerator pedal until the 8. Display the list of memorised speeds or programmed cruise speed is reached again. 5. Use the speed suggested by the sSpeed For more information on Memorising speeds, Limit recognition and recommendation refer to the corresponding section. system. For more information on Speed Limit recognition and recommendation and its 6 memorisation, refer to the corresponding Switching off the ignition cancels any section. programmed speed setting. Switching on The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, F replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it Turn wheel 1 to the CRUISE position: cruise replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. control mode is selected but the function is It is recommended that you always keep your feet close paused. to the pedals.

149 Driving F Press button 2 or 3: your vehicle's current To modify the cruise speed setting using Switching off speed becomes the cruise speed. memorised speed settings and from the touch The cruise control is activated (ON). screen: F Turn wheel 1 to the 0 position. The display F press button 5 to display the memorised of information related to the cruise control speed settings, disappears. Pause F press the button for the desired speed You can temporarily stop the speed limiter by setting. Operating fault pressing button 4 again: the display confirms The selection screen closes after a few that it has been stopped (Pause). moments. Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the This setting becomes the new cruise speed. cruise control. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or Modifying the cruise speed To modify the cruise speed setting using a qualified workshop. setting the speed suggested by the Speed Limit recognition and recommendation system: The cruise control must be active. F the speed suggested is displayed in the instrument panel, To modify the cruise speed setting from the F make a first press on button ; a message current speed of the vehicle: 5 is displayed to confirm the memorisation F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make request, successive short presses on button 2 or 3, F press button 5 again to save the suggested F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h), speed. press and hold button 2 or 3. The speed displays immediately in the instrument panel as the new speed setting. Take care: pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the Exceeding the programmed speed of your vehicle. speed If the speed setting is exceeded, the displayed As a precaution, it is recommended speed flashes. that the cruise speed chosen be close The display becomes steady again once the to the current speed of your vehicle, so speed of the vehicle has reached the level of as to avoid any sudden acceleration or the speed setting again. deceleration of the vehicle.

150 Driving

When the cruise control is switched on, be Adaptive cruise control Principles of operation careful if you maintain the pressure on one Using radar with a range of about 100 metres, of the programmed speed modification located at the front of the vehicle, this system buttons: this may result in a very rapid The system allows the speed of detects a vehicle travelling in front of your change in the speed of your vehicle. your vehicle to be maintained at the vehicle. Do not use the cruise control on slippery setting you have made, and also to It automatically adapts the speed of your roads or in heavy traffic. respect the inter-vehicle time that vehicle to that of the vehicle in front. When descending a steep hill, the cruise you have selected between your If the vehicle in front is travelling more slowly, control system cannot prevent the vehicle vehicle and the one in front, when the system progressively reduces the speed of from exceeding the programmed speed. the situation permits it. your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the On steep climbs or when towing, the driver had pressed the "-" button). programmed speed may not be reached If your vehicle is too close to the vehicle in or maintained. Switching between the front or is approaching it too quickly, adaptive The use of mats not approved by cruise control is automatically deactivated. CITROËN may interfere with the operation types of cruise control The driver is then alerted by an audible signal of the cruise control. The choice between "adaptive" and "standard" accompanied by a message. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: cruise control is made in the menu. Driving If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes - ensure that mats are secured correctly, lane, the adaptive cruise control gradually - never fit one mat on top of another. F Turn the cruise control wheel to accelerates your vehicle to return to the the "CRUISE" position. programmed speed. 6 If the driver operates the direction indicator to the left (left-hand drive) or to the right (right- F In the Driving menu, select the Driving hand drive), to overtake a slower vehicle, the functions tab and then Active cruise adaptive cruise control allows your vehicle to control to activate or deactivate adaptive temporarily approach the vehicle in front to cruise control. assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed. For more information on the Cruise control, refer to the corresponding section. The adaptive cruise control operates by day and at night, in fog or moderate rainfall. 151 Driving

- when the speed of the vehicle in front is too The adaptive cruise control uses only If the cruise speed setting is above low, engine braking to slow the vehicle. 93 mph (150 km/h), the adaptive cruise - when the speed of your vehicle becomes Consequently the vehicle loses speed control switches to standard cruise control too low. slowly, as when releasing the accelerator mode, without automatic regulation of the pedal. inter-vehicle safety distance (a message The regulation range is limited: there will appears in the instrument panel). The inter-vehicle time setting is no longer be any adjustment of speed if the memorised when switching off the ignition. difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front becomes too high (19 mph (30 km/h)). The adaptive cruise control cannot in any circumstances replace the observation of Steering mounted control speed limits, nor the need for the vigilance If the difference between the programmed on the part of the driver. speed setting and the speed of the It is recommended that you always keep vehicle in front is too great, the speed your feet close to the pedals. cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is automatically deactivated. The adaptive cruise control can be paused manually or automatically: - by pressing button 4, General information - by pressing the brake pedal, - if the ESC system is activated, for safety The adaptive cruise control is switched on reasons, manually, it requires the speed of the vehicle - if there is an action on the electric parking 1. Select cruise control mode. to be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 93 mph brake control, 2. Use the current speed as the speed (150 km/h) and the engagement of: - when an inter-vehicle time threshold is setting/Lower the speed setting. - third gear or higher with a manual gearbox, reached (calculated according to the relative 3. Use the current speed as the speed - second gear in manual mode with an speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle setting/Raise the speed setting. automatic gearbox, in front and the inter-vehicle time setting - position D with an automatic gearbox. chosen), 4. Pause/Resume cruise control. - when the distance between your vehicle and the one in front becomes too short,

152 Driving

5. Display the list of memorised speeds or, 9. Value of the programmed speed or F choose a speed setting: it is displayed on Use the speed suggested by the Speed adjusted speed below the programmed the instrument panel. Limit recognition and recommendation speed. The selection screen closes after a few system. moments. The modification is then accepted. 6. Display and adjustment of the - by pressing button 5, if your vehicle is programmed inter-vehicle distance. Operation equipped with speed limit recognition: Switching on F the speed to be memorised appears on For more information on Memorising speeds, the instrument panel. refer to the corresponding section. Adaptive cruise control must be selected in the F press button 5 again to save the speed. For more information on Speed Limit Driving menu. The value appears immediately on the recognition and recommendation and its F Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: instrument panel. memorisation, refer to the corresponding cruise control mode is selected but the section. function is paused. For more information on Speed Limit F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current recognition and recommendation and its speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise memorisation, refer to the corresponding Displays on the instrument speed setting. section. panel The cruise control is activated (ON). By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at 2 seconds. Otherwise, the last setting made will be used As a precaution, it is recommended that when switching on the system. you select a cruise speed setting close to 6 the current speed of your vehicle. Modification of the cruise speed Information is grouped together on the instrument panel. - using buttons 2 or 3: F by successive short presses, to change Changing the inter-vehicle distance 7. Cruise control pause/resume indication. in steps of + or – 1 mph (km/h), 8. Cruise control selection indication, or F by a maintained press, to change in steps Press button 6 to select a new inter-vehicle vehicle speed adjustment phase. of + or – 5 mph (km/h). distance setting from the three levels ("Close", - pressing button 5: "Normal", "Distant"). F the six speeds memorised are displayed This setting remains memorised, whatever the in the touch screen, state of the system.

153 Driving

If a vehicle presence is detected by the Driving situations and radar and if the speed selected is much associated alerts higher than the speed of that vehicle, the system does not activate and the The table below describes the alerts and alert message "Activation not possible, messages displayed depending on the driving conditions unsuitable" is displayed until situation. the driving conditions are safe to allow The display of these alerts is not sequential. activation of the system.

Exceeding the programmed setting

It is possible to exceed the speed setting temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. Then simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed. If the programmed setting is unintentionally exceeded, descending a steep hill for example, the speed setting in the instrument panel flashes as a warning.

154 Driving

Display on the Associated Symbol Comments instrument panel message No vehicle detected: the system operates as a standard cruise control.

Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar: the system operates as a standard cruise control.

"SPEED Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's ADJUSTED" cruise speed setting. The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle and then hold it at the speed of the vehicle in front so as to observe the programmed inter-vehicle time. The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the cruise speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front.

"SPEED When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting – 19 mph ADJUSTED" (30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to signal that automatic deactivation of the system is imminent. 6

"Cruise If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment that it can make and in the absence of control any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction in paused". the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused. The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.

155 Driving

- if the system does not slow the vehicle When the adaptive cruise control is enough to continue to maintain a safe automatically paused, it can only be distance, for example when descending reactivated when safe conditions are a steep hill. restored. The message "Activation The regulation range is limited to a maximum not possible, conditions unsuitable" - vehicles not running in the middle of the difference of 19 mph (30 km/h) between the is displayed while reactivation is not lane, possible. cruise speed setting and the speed of the When the conditions allow, it is vehicle in front. Above this, the system goes into recommended that the function be pause if the safety distance becomes too short. reactivated by pressing button 2 or 3, which will make the current speed of your Poor weather conditions (very heavy vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rain, accumulation of snow in front of the rather than by pressing button 4 (on/ radar) may hinder the operation of the pause) which reactivates the cruise control system, with the display of the operating using the old cruise speed setting, which fault message "SYSTEM INACTIVE: may be very different from the current Reduced visibility". The function remains - vehicles entering a corner, speed of your vehicle. unavailable until the message disappears. - vehicles changing lane at the last moment.

The cruise control does not take account of: - stationary vehicles, Operating limits Since the radar detection range is relatively - vehicles driving in the opposite direction. narrow, it is possible that the system cannot The adaptive cruise control uses only engine detect: braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing Malfunction the accelerator pedal. The system is paused automatically: In the event of a malfunction of the adaptive - if the vehicle in front slows down too much cruise control system, you are warned by an or too suddenly, and the driver does not audible signal and the display of the message brake, - vehicles of reduced width, such as "Driving aid functions fault". - if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and motorcycles, for example, Have the system checked by a CITROËN the vehicle in front. dealer or a qualified workshop.

156 Driving

This system provides the following When the cruise control is working, take Operation of the radar, located in the functions: care if keeping pressed one of the cruise front bumper, may be impaired by the - Automatically maintains the control programmed speed change accumulation of dirt (dust, mud, etc.) or in vehicle at the speed set by the buttons: this can lead to a very rapid certain weather conditions (snow, frost, driver. change in the speed of your vehicle. etc.). - Automatic adjustment of the Do not use adaptive cruise control on The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE: distance between your vehicle slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic. Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate and the one in front. When descending a steep hill, the cruise that the function is in standby. control system cannot prevent the vehicle Clean the front bumper regularly. With an automatic gearbox, automatic from exceeding the programmed speed. If the front bumper is to be repainted or adjustment of the distance can cause your On steep climbs or when towing, the retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer vehicle to come to a complete stop. programmed speed may not be reached or a qualified workshop. Certain types of or maintained. paint could interfere with the operation of The use of mats not approved by the radar. CITROËN may interfere with the operation Cruise control remains active after of the cruise control. changing gear regardless of the gearbox To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: type. - ensure that mats are secured correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another. Adaptive cruise control until vehicle is stopped/ It manages the acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle by automatically acting on the 6 until 19 mph (30 km/h) engine and the braking system. Function until vehicle is stopped: with automatic gearbox Function until 19 mph (30 km/h): with manual gearbox

For this purpose there is a radar installed in the front bumper.

157 Driving

2. Use the current speed as the speed Primarily designed for driving on main This system is a driving aid that cannot, setting/decrease the speed setting. roads and motorways, this system only in any circumstances, replace the need to 3. Use the current speed as the speed works on moving vehicles, driving in the observe speed limits and safety distances, setting/increase the speed setting. same direction as your vehicle. nor the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. 4. Pause/Resume cruise control. Some vehicles present on the road may 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed not be properly seen or may be poorly Limit recognition and recommendation. Principle of operation interpreted by the camera and/or radar 6. Display and adjustment of the (e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor programmed inter-vehicle distance. The system automatically adapts the speed of assessment of the distances and lead to your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front, to For more information on the Speed Limit the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or maintain a constant distance. recognition and recommendation, refer to braking. If the vehicle in front is driving more slowly, the the corresponding section. The driver must be ready at all times system slows or even stops your vehicle, using to retake control of their vehicle by engine braking and the braking system (for permanently holding both hands on the versions fitted with an automatic gearbox). steering wheel and keeping their feet near If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes the brake and accelerator pedals. Displays in the instrument lane, the cruise control progressively panel accelerates your vehicle to return to the programmed speed. If the driver operates a direction indicator to Steering mounted control overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed.

7. Indication of the presence/absence of a target vehicle. 8. Indication of cruise control activation/ The brake lamps illuminate as soon as deactivation. the braking system is activated with 9. Value of the speed setting. deceleration of the vehicle. 1. Select cruise control mode. 158 Driving

10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary With a manual gearbox • When changing from mode D to N with an (versions fitted with an automatic With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and automatic gearbox. gearbox). 99 mph (30 and 160 km/h): - or automatically: 11. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit F When the vehicle is moving, press one of • If the ESC system is activated, for safety recognition and recommendation. the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your reasons. vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. • When the speed of the vehicle falls below As soon as a vehicle is detected, the symbol The cruise control starts operating (displayed 19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox. 7 is filled with the colour associated with the in green). cruise control mode. By default, the symbol 7 is empty. With an automatic gearbox When the cruise control is in operation, the Mode D or M must be selected. symbols 7 and 8 are displayed in green. By With the speed of the vehicle between 19 and When the cruise control is paused, it default, they are displayed in grey. 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h): can only be reactivated when all of the F When the vehicle is moving, press one of safety conditions are met. The message the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your "Activation not possible, conditions vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible. Remembering the settings Switching off the ignition cancels any speed 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting. setting value chosen by the driver. 13. Position of vehicle detected by the radar. By default, the inter-vehicle distance is set Reactivating the function 6 This information is visible in the instrument at "Normal" (2 dashes). Otherwise, the last Versions fitted with a manual gearbox panel in "DRIVING" display mode. setting made will be used when switching on To reactivate the function, the driver must the system. accelerate to reach at least 19 mph (30 km/h), then press one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. Switching on Pause Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox To switch on the cruise control Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to F With the engine running, turn the wheel The cruise control can be paused manually by: a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle to the " " position. The system is - action by the driver: 1 CRUISE stationary; the cruise control is paused. paused (grey display). • On the button 4 (Pause). • On the brake pedal. • On the electric parking brake control. • On the clutch pedal, by pressing and holding for more than 5 seconds. 159 Driving

The driver should press the accelerator pedal Take care: pressing and holding button Modification of the programmed to move off, then reactivate the system above 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the 19 mph (30 km/h) by pressing button 2, 3 or 4. inter-vehicle distance speed of your vehicle. If the driver takes no action following this immobilisation, the electric parking brake is applied automatically after a while (approx. five minutes). Modification from the Speed Limit recognition and recommendation system Three threshold settings are suggested for the inter-vehicle distance: As a safety measure, wait until the current F The suggested speed is displayed in the - "Distant" (3 dashes), speed approaches the speed setting to instrument panel. - "Normal" (2 dashes), reactivate the function by pressing button 4. F Make an initial press on button 5; a - "Close" (1 dash). message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request. Engine running and with the wheel at the F Press button 5 again to save the suggested "CRUISE" position: Modification of the speed speed. F Press button 6 to display the selection setting The speed displays immediately in the screen for inter-vehicle distance. F With the engine running and cruise control on instrument panel as the new speed setting. By pressing button 6 repeatedly, cycle (green), you can modify the speed setting. through the predefined settings. For more information on the Speed Limit The selection screen closes after a few recognition and recommendation, refer to seconds. Modification from the current the corresponding section. The modification is then accepted. speed This setting remains in memory, whatever the F By successive short presses on button 2 or As a precaution, it is recommended state of the system and when the ignition is 3, to lower or raise the setting in steps of + that you select a cruise speed close to switched off. or – 1 mph (km/h), the current speed of your vehicle, so F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3, to as to avoid any sudden acceleration or The selection also applies to the stopping lower or raise the setting in steps of + or – deceleration of the vehicle. distance (versions with EAT6 and 5 mph (km/h). EAT8 automatic gearbox).

160 Driving

Exceeding the programmed Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments setting "Cruise control paused" System paused. It is possible to exceed the speed setting No vehicle detected. temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. (grey) The cruise control no longer manages the "Cruise control paused" System paused. braking system during this period. A vehicle has been Simply release the accelerator pedal to return detected. to the programmed speed. (grey)

If the programmed speed setting is exceeded, "Cruise control on" System activated. the display of the speed setting disappears No vehicle detected. and a message "Cruise control suspended" is displayed until the accelerator pedal is according to released. (green) the inter-vehicle distance selected Driving situations and associated alerts "Cruise control on" System activated. A vehicle has been To benefit from all necessary information on detected. 6 the instrument panel, you must select the (green) "DRIVING" display mode beforehand. The table below describes the alerts and according to messages displayed depending on the driving the inter-vehicle situation. distance selected The display of these alerts is not sequential. "Cruise control System activated. suspended" The driver has temporarily taken or control of the vehicle by accelerating.

(green)

161 Driving

Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

"Take back control of the The driver must take + vehicle" back control of the vehicle by accelerating or braking, depending on (green) (orange) the circumstances.

"Take back control of the The system cannot + vehicle" manage the critical situation alone (emergency braking of (green) (red) the target vehicle, rapid insertion of another vehicle between the two vehicles). The driver must immediately take back control of the vehicle.

"Activation not possible, The system refuses conditions unsuitable" to activate the cruise 70 control (speed outside the operating range, or (orange) winding road). 70 (grey)

162 Driving

Versions fitted with an automatic gearbox When the driver must suspend the cruise control system:

Indicator lamp Display Associated message Comments

"Cruise control paused" The system has brought (for a few seconds) the vehicle to a complete stop and is holding it or immobilised. The driver must according to accelerate to move off the inter-vehicle - Vehicles in a tight bend. again. (grey)/(green) distance selected - When approaching a roundabout. The cruise control and the actual remains paused until the distance from the driver reactivates it. target vehicle

Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to Cases of non-detection by the radar: a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle - Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. - When following a narrow vehicle. stationary; the cruise control is paused. - Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, Reactivate cruise control when conditions The driver should press the accelerator etc.). permit. pedal to move off, then reactivate the 6 system by pressing one of buttons 2, 3 or Cases where the driver is urged to take 4. If the driver takes no action following this back control immediately: immobilisation, the electric parking brake is - Excessively sharp deceleration of the applied automatically after a while (approx. five vehicle in front of you. minutes). - Vehicles crossing your lane. Operating limits - Oncoming vehicles. The system cannot exceed the limits of the laws of physics. The system cannot deal with certain situations - When a vehicle cuts in sharply between and the driver has to take back control of the your vehicle and the one in front. vehicle. 163 Driving

The system must not be activated in the The cruise control operates by day and The system is not intended for the following situations: night, in fog or moderate rainfall. following situations: - When the "space-saver" spare wheel is However, it is strongly recommended - the front end of the vehicle has been being used (depending on version). that you always adapt your speed and modified (addition of long-range - When towing. your safety distance from vehicles ahead headlamps, painting of the front - Following an impact on the front bumper. according to the driving conditions, the bumper), weather and the road surface. - driving on a racing track, Be particularly careful: Use the cruise control only where - driving on a rolling road, - When motorcycles are present and the driving conditions allow running - use of snow chains, non-slip covers or when there are vehicles staggered at a constant speed and keeping an studded tyres. onto the traffic lane. adequate safety distance. The use of mats not approved by - When you enter a tunnel or cross Do not activate the cruise control in urban CITROËN may interfere with the operation a bridge. areas where pedestrians are likely to of the cruise control. cross the road, in heavy traffic, on winding To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: or steep roads, on slippery or flooded - ensure that the mat is secured roads, when there is snowfall, if the front correctly, bumper is damaged or when the brake - never fit one mat on top of another. lamps have failed. In certain circumstances, it may not be possible for the speed setting to be maintained or even reached: loaded vehicle, ascending a steep hill, etc.

164 Driving

The following situations may interfere with Malfunction Active Safety Brake with the operation of the system or prevent it Collision Risk Alert and from working: If the cruise control - poor visibility (inadequate street malfunctions, dashes are Intelligent emergency lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense displayed instead of the braking assistance fog, etc.), cruise control speed setting. - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming If this warning lamp comes vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp on, accompanied by an road, leaving a tunnel, alternating alert message and an shade and light, etc.), audible signal, this confirms - camera or radar masked (mud, frost, The system allows: a malfunction. snow, condensation, etc.). - the driver to be warned that their vehicle is In these situations, detection performance Have the system checked by a CITROËN at risk of collision with the vehicle in front, may be reduced. dealer or a qualified workshop. - a collision to be prevented, or its severity to The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE: be limited, by reducing the vehicle's speed. Reduced visibility". is displayed to indicate that the function is in standby. This system is a driving aid that includes three The adaptive cruise control deactivates functions: automatically if the use of a "space-saver" - Collision Risk Alert (alert if there is a risk of type spare wheel is detected or if there is collision), a malfunction on the lateral brake lamps or Clean the front bumper regularly. - Intelligent emergency braking assistance, 6 trailer brake lamps (for approved trailers). If the front bumper is to be repainted or - Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer braking). or a qualified workshop. Certain types of paint could interfere with the operation of the radar.

165 Driving

Deactivation/Activation The following situations may interfere with By default, the system is automatically the operation of the system or prevent it activated at every engine start. from working: The system can be deactivated or activated via - poor visibility (inadequate street the vehicle settings menu. lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog, etc.), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming Deactivation of the system is vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp signalled by the illumination of this road, leaving a tunnel, alternating indicator lamp, accompanied by the shade and light, etc.), display of a message. The vehicle has a camera located at the top of - camera or radar obstructed (mud, frost, the windscreen, and, depending on the version, snow, condensation, etc.). a radar located in the front bumper. Operating conditions and On versions with camera alone, this limits message indicates to you that the camera This system is designed to assist the is obstructed: "Driving aids camera: The ESC system must not be faulty. driver and improve road safety. visibility limited, see user guide". The ASR must not be deactivated. It is the driver's responsibility to In these situations, detection performance All passenger seat belts must be fastened. continuously monitor the state of the may be reduced. Driving at a steady speed on roads with few traffic, observing the driving regulations. bends is required. This system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

As soon as the system detects a potential obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in case automatic braking is needed. This may cause a slight noise and a slight sensation of deceleration.

166 Driving

Clean the windscreen regularly, The system is automatically deactivated Collision Risk Alert particularly the area in front of the camera. after the use of the "space-saver" type It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of The internal surface of the windscreen can spare wheel is detected, or if a fault with collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian also become misted around the camera. the lateral brake lamps is detected. present in their traffic lane. In humid and cold weather, demist the windscreen regularly. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the Modifying the alert trigger bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could It is possible that warnings are not given, threshold conceal the detection camera. are given too late or seem unjustified. This threshold determines how you wish Clean the front bumper, especially around Consequently, always stay in control of to be alerted of the presence of a moving the radar, removing mud, snow, etc. your vehicle and be prepared to react at or stationary vehicle in front of you, or any time to avoid an accident. a pedestrian present in your traffic lane.

The current threshold can only be In the following cases, deactivating the system After an impact, the function automatically modified via the touch screen's via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: stops operating. Contact a CITROËN Driving menu. - towing a trailer, dealer or a qualified workshop to have the - carrying long objects on roof bars or roof system checked. You can select one of three predefined rack, thresholds: 6 - with snow chains fitted, - "Distant", - before using an automatic car wash, with - "Normal", the engine running, If the front bumper is to be repainted or - "Close". - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road retouched, contact a CITROËN dealer The last threshold selected is kept in memory in a workshop, or a qualified workshop. Certain types of when the ignition is switched off. - towed vehicle, engine running, paint could interfere with the operation of - damaged front bumper (version with radar), the radar. - following impact to the windscreen close to Operation the detection camera. Depending on the degree of risk of collision detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen by the driver, different levels of alert can be triggered and displayed in the instrument panel. 167 Driving These levels of alert are based on the inter- Intelligent emergency It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid vehicle time between your vehicle and the a frontal collision by your vehicle where the vehicle in front. braking assistance driver fails to react. If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid They take account of the vehicle dynamics, a collision, this system will supplement the the speed of your vehicle and the one in front, braking, within the limits of the laws of physics. Operation the environmental conditions, the operation of This assistance will only be provided if you The system operates under the following the vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to press the brake pedal. conditions: trigger the alert at the best moment. - The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, signalling to you that the vehicle in Active Safety Brake - The vehicle's speed does not exceed front is very close. 50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. - The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h) Level 2 (red): visual and audible (versions with camera and radar) when alert, warning you that a collision is a moving vehicle is detected. imminent. If the camera and/or radar have The message " " is displayed. Brake! confirmed the presence of a vehicle or a pedestrian, this warning lamp flashes once the function is acting Where the speed of your vehicle is too fast on the vehicle's brakes. approaching another vehicle, the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level With an automatic gearbox, in the event of 2 alert may be displayed directly. automatic emergency braking until the vehicle Important: alert level 1 is never displayed comes to a complete stop, keep the brake when the "Close" trigger threshold has pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from been selected. This function, also called automatic emergency starting off again. braking, intervenes following the alert if the With a manual gearbox, in the event of driver does not react quickly enough and does automatic emergency braking until the vehicle not operate the vehicle's brakes. comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.

168 Driving

The driver can maintain control of the Lane Departure Warning This system is a driving aid that cannot, vehicle at any time by sharply turning System in any circumstances, replace the the steering wheel and/or pressing the driver's own vigilance. The driver must accelerator pedal. Using a camera located at the top of the remain in control of the vehicle under all windscreen to identify lane markings on the circumstances. ground, the system corrects the trajectory of The system helps the driver only when Operation of the function may be felt by the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily slight vibration in the brake pedal. a risk of involuntary crossing of a line. wandering from the lane it is being driven If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, This system is particularly useful on motorways in. It does not manage the safe driving the automatic braking is maintained for and main roads. distance, the speed of the vehicle or the 1 to 2 seconds. brakes. The driver must hold the steering wheel with both hands in a way that allows control to be maintained in circumstances where the system is not able to intervene Malfunction (if lane markings disappear, for example). It is necessary to observe the driving In the event of a fault with the regulations and take a break every two system, you are alerted by the hours. illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by the display of Conditions for operation 6 a message and an audible signal. The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 mph and 112 mph (65 km/h and 180 km/h). Operation Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified The driver must hold the steering wheel with Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle workshop to have the system checked. both hands. involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings The change of trajectory must not be detected, it makes the correction to the accompanied by operation of the direction trajectory required to return the vehicle to its indicators. initial path. The ESC system must be activated and fault- The driver will notice a turning movement of the free. steering wheel.

This warning lamp flashes during trajectory correction.

169 Driving

If the driver wishes to maintain the If the system detects that the driver is not trajectory of the vehicle, they can prevent holding the wheel firmly enough during the correction by keeping a firm grip on an automatic correction of trajectory, the wheel (during an avoiding manoeuvre, it interrupts the correction. An alert is for example). triggered to encourage the driver to take The correction is interrupted if the back control of the vehicle. direction indicators are operated.

Driving situations and associated alerts To benefit from all necessary information on the instrument panel, you must previously select the "DRIVING" display mode. The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed depending on the driving situation. While the direction indicators are on and for The display of these alerts is not sequential. a few seconds after switching them off, the system considers that any change of trajectory is voluntary and no correction is triggered during this period. However, with the Blind Spot Detection system activated, if the driver starts changing lanes and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory of the vehicle even though the direction indicators are on. For more information on the Blind Spot Detection, refer to the corresponding section.

170 Driving

Display and/ Status of the Indicator or associated Comments function lamp message OFF System deactivated.

(grey)

ON System active, conditions not met: - speed below 40 mph (65 km/h), (grey) - no lane marking recognised, - ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - "sporty" driving.

ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the system (for example: detection of a trailer, use of the "space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)

Display and/ Status of the Indicator or associated Comments function lamp message 6 ON Detection of lane markings. Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). (green)

ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of involuntary crossing is detected (orange line). (orange)/(green)

ON - If, during correction, the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to the driver. (orange)/(green) - During correction of the trajectory, if the system determines that the correction will not be "Take control of the enough and that a solid line is crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must vehicle". complete the correction of the trajectory. 171 Driving

The system is not intended for driving in the Operating limits The following situations may interfere with following situations: the operation of the system or prevent it The system goes into standby automatically in - driving on a speed circuit, working: the following cases: - driving with a trailer, - conditions of poor visibility (inadequate - ESC deactivated or operation triggered, - driving on a rolling stand, street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog), - speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater - driving on unstable surfaces. than 112 mph (180 km/h), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming - connected electrically to a trailer, vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp - use of the "space-saver" spare road, leaving a tunnel, alternating Activation/Deactivation wheel detected (as detection is not shade and light), Activation and deactivation of the system is immediate, deactivation of the system is - windscreen area located in front of the done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. recommended), camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, Select the "Driving functions" then the "Lane - dynamic driving style detected, pressure on snow-covered, damaged or covered by assist" tab. the brake or accelerator pedal, a sticker, The system state remains in memory when the - driving where there are no lane markings, - lane markings worn, hidden (snow, ignition is switched off. - activation of the direction indicators, mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.), - crossing the inside line on a bend, - running close to the vehicle in front - driving in a tight corner, (the lane markings may not be - inactivity by the driver detected during detected), correction. - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. Malfunction

Risk of undesirable operation In the event of a fault with the system, you are alerted by the illumination of these warning Deactivation of the system is recommended in lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by the following situations: the display of a message and an audible signal. - driving on a road surface in poor condition, Have the system checked by a CITROËN - poor weather conditions, dealer or a qualified workshop. - driving on slippery surfaces (ice).

172 Driving

Blind Spot Detection This driving aid system is designed to Operation improve safety when driving and is in no Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers circumstances a substitute for the use monitor the blind spots. of the interior rear view mirror and door The alert is given by an orange warning lamp mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon constantly check the traffic, to assess the as a vehicle – car, lorry, cycle – is detected. relative distances and speeds of other The following conditions must be met for this: vehicles and to predict their movements - all vehicles are moving in the same direction before deciding whether to change lane. and in adjacent lanes, This system is a driving aid that cannot, in - the speed of the vehicle must be between any circumstances, replace the need for 7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h), vigilance on the part of the driver. - you overtake a vehicle with a speed This system warns the driver of the presence difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h), of another vehicle in the blind spots of their - a vehicle overtakes you with a speed vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), of vision), as soon as this presents a potential Activation/Deactivation - the traffic is flowing normally, danger. The function is activated and - overtaking a vehicle over a certain period deactivated in the Driving menu of of time and the vehicle being overtaken the touch screen. remains in the blind spot, - you are driving on a straight or slightly 6 When the function is activated, curved road, this indicator lamp comes on in the - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a instrument panel. caravan, etc.

The state of the system stays in memory when switching off the ignition.

A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror The system is automatically deactivated on the side in question: when towing with a towing device - immediately, when being overtaken, approved by CITROËN. - after a delay of about one second, when overtaking a vehicle slowly.

173 Driving

- with vehicles moving in the opposite The system may suffer temporary direction, interference in certain weather conditions - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner, (rain, hail, etc.). - when overtaking or being overtaken by In particular, driving on a wet surface or a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which the transition from a dry area to a wet area is both detected in the rear blind spot and can cause false alerts (e.g. the presence present in the driver's front field of vision, of water droplets in the blind spot is - when overtaking quickly, interpreted as a vehicle). - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the front and behind are confused with a lorry or sensors are not covered with mud, ice or a stationary object, snow. - if the Park Assist function is activated. Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper the correct operation of the system.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp flashes for a few moments in the instrument High pressure jet wash panel, accompanied by the Service When washing your vehicle, keep the warning lamp coming on and the nozzle at a minimum distance of 12 inches display of a message. (30 cm) from the sensors.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified No alert will be given in the following situations: workshop to have the system checked. - in the presence of non-moving objects (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.),

174 Driving

This alert is issued via the display of Active Blind Spot These systems cannot in any circumstances a message encouraging you to take a break, replace the need for vigilance on the part Monitoring System accompanied by an audible signal. of the driver who must remain in control (depending on version) If the driver does not follow this advice, the of their decisions. In no case can these In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is systems keep the driver awake or prevent mirror on the side in question, a correction of stopped. them from falling asleep at the wheel. trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking The system resets itself if one of the following with the direction indicators on, to help you It is the driver's responsibility to stop if they feel tired. conditions is met: avoid a collision. - engine running, the vehicle has been stationary for more than 15 minutes, Conditions for operation - the ignition has been switched off for a few Activation/Deactivation minutes, The following systems must be activated: - the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their - Blind Spot Detection, These functions are activated and door is open. - Lane Departure Warning System. deactivated in the Driving menu of The speed of the vehicle must be between the touch screen. 40 and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) inclusive. As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops The state of the system stays in the memory below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes when the ignition is switched off. into standby. Fatigue detection system The driving time is counted again once the speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at Driver Attention Warning 6 least every two hours. Depending on version, the function relies either The system triggers an alert once it on the "Driver Attention Warning" system alone detects that the driver has not taken or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert" a break after two hours of driving at Driver Attention Alert a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). system. Depending on version, the "Driver Attention Warning" may be combined with the "Driver Attention Alert".

175 Driving

After three first level alerts, the system triggers Clean the windscreen regularly, a new alert with the message "Take a break!", particularly the area in front of the camera. accompanied by a more pronounced audible The internal surface of the windscreen can signal. also become misted around the camera. In humid and cold weather, demist the In certain driving conditions (poor road windscreen regularly. surface or strong winds), the system may Do not allow snow to accumulate on the give alerts independent of the driver's bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could level of vigilance. conceal the detection camera. Clean the front bumper, especially around the radar, removing mud, snow, etc. Using a camera placed at the top The following situations may interfere with of the windscreen, the system the operation of the system or prevent it assesses the driver's level of working: vigilance by identifying variations - poor visibility (inadequate lighting of in trajectory compared to the lane the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain, markings. dense fog, etc.), - dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming This system is particularly suited to fast roads Parking sensors vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). road, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light, etc.), - windscreen area located in front of the camera dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, damaged or covered by a sticker, - lane markings absent, worn, hidden When the system interprets the behaviour of (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or etc.), inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it - close to the vehicle ahead (lane triggers the first level of alert. markings not detected), The driver is then alerted by the message - roads that are narrow, winding, etc. Using sensors located in the bumper, this "Take care!", accompanied by an audible function warns of the proximity of obstacles signal. (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering their field of detection. 176 Driving

The information on proximity is given by an This function is a manoeuvring aid which Front parking sensors intermittent sound signal, the succession of cannot, in any circumstances, replace the which becomes more rapid as the vehicle In addition to the rear parking sensors, the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. approaches the obstacle. front parking sensors are triggered when an The driver must remain attentive and stay The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) obstacle is detected in front and the speed of in control of their vehicle. indicates which side the obstacle is on. the vehicle remains below 6 mph (10 km/h). They must always check the vehicle's When the distance between the vehicle and The front parking sensors are interrupted if surroundings before undertaking the obstacle becomes less than approximately the vehicle stops for more than three seconds a manoeuvre. thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes in forward gear, if no further obstacles are During the entire manoeuvre, the driver continuous. detected or when the speed of the vehicle must ensure that the space remains clear. exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

Visual assistance Rear parking sensors The sound emitted by the speaker (front or The system is switched on by engaging reverse rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in gear. front or behind. This is confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out of reverse gear. Deactivation/Activation 6 It supplements the audible signal by displaying The function is deactivated and bars on the screen that move progressively activated in the Driving menu of the nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant touch screen. Audible assistance obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very close obstacles). This warning lamp comes on in the When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" instrument panel when the function symbol is displayed on the screen. is deactivated. A new selection reactivates the function.

The state of the function stays in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

177 Driving

- A front or rear impact to the vehicle can The rear parking sensors system will In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the distort the settings of the sensors, which is be deactivated automatically if a trailer sensors are not covered by mud, ice or not always detected by the system: distance or bicycle carrier is connected to snow. measurements may be incorrect. a towing device installed in line with the When reverse gear is engaged, an audible - The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is manufacturer's recommendations. signal (long beep) indicates that the very loaded can affect the distance In this case, the outline of a trailer is sensors may be dirty. measurements. displayed at the rear of the image of the Certain sound sources (motorcycle, - The sensors may be affected by poor vehicle. lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger weather conditions (heavy rain, thick fog, the audible signals of the parking sensor snowfall, etc.). system. The parking sensors are deactivated while the Park Assist system is measuring a space. For more information on the Park Assist, refer High pressure jet wash to the corresponding section. Operating fault When washing your vehicle, direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the Operating limits If the system fails, when reverse sensors. gear is engaged this warning lamp - Certain obstacles located in the sensors' flashes for a few seconds before blind spots may not be detected or no lighting up continuously, together Reversing camera longer be detected during the manoeuvre. with the Service warning lamp. - Sounds such as those emitted by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, A message appears, accompanied by an pneumatic drills, etc.) may interfere with the audible signal. vehicle's sensors. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified - Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound workshop. waves: pedestrians may not be detected. - Accumulated snow or dead leaves on the road surface can interfere with the vehicle's sensors.

The reversing camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged. 178 Driving

Depending on version, the image is displayed The blue lines 1 represent the general direction on the touch screen or the instrument panel. of the vehicle (the gap represents the width of Vision 360 your vehicle except for the door mirrors). The red line represents a distance of about The reversing camera function may be 2 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear supplemented with parking sensors. bumper. The green lines 3 represent distances of about The reversing camera cannot, in any circumstances, one and two metres beyond the edge of your replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. vehicle's rear bumper. The turquoise blue curves 4 represent the maximum turning circle.

This system allows the near surroundings of Opening the tailgate causes the display to the vehicle to be viewed in the instrument panel disappear. using cameras. They are situated at the front and rear of the vehicle, as well as under the door mirrors. Clean the reversing camera regularly Depending on the angle of view chosen (front using a soft, dry cloth. view, rear view or 360° panoramic view), the Vision 360 system provides a specific visual aid The representation with overlaid lines helps the in particular driving conditions, such as when manoeuvre. High pressure jet wash 6 When washing your vehicle, do not direct entering a blind crossroads or manoeuvring in the lance from less than 30 cm from the areas with reduced visibility. They are represented by lines marked lens of the camera. Once activated, this function is operational up "on the ground" and do not allow you to to 9 mph (15 km/h). Above 19 mph (30 km/h), determine the position of tall obstacles (for the system deactivates automatically. example: other vehicles, etc.) relative to the vehicle. Some distortion of the image is normal. It is normal to have a part of the number plate showing in the bottom of the screen.

179 Driving

This system is a visual aid that cannot in Rear vision Vision 360 any circumstances replace the need for The camera situated on the tailgate is activated The cameras situated on the front and rear vigilance on the part of the driver. and the view of the area behind your vehicle is bumpers as well as those below the door The images provided by the camera(s) displayed in the instrument panel and behaves mirrors activate and a view from above of your may be distorted by the relief. The as a reversing camera, regardless of the vehicle in its close environment is generated presence of areas in shadow, bright position of the gear selector. and is displayed in the instrument panel. sunlight, or poor lighting conditions may The blue outline represents the width of make the image dark and reduce contrast. your vehicle (without mirrors): its orientation depends on the position of the steering wheel. Opening a door or the tailgate will disrupt the The red line represents the distance of 30 cm) 360 and rear views. from the rear bumper and the two green lines Installation of the very cold climate screen will Forward vision the distances of 1 m and 2 m respectively from alter the image transmitted by the front camera. The camera situated on the front bumper is the rear bumper. activated and the views of the area to the front left and the area to the front right of your vehicle appear simultaneously in the instrument The rear vision is displayed automatically panel. when reverse gear is engaged, regardless of the state of the system.

180 Driving Operation or The driver can take control at any time by F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving gripping the steering wheel. Function activation functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid". F Select "Camera OFF". This manoeuvring assistance system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must remain in control of their Check the cleanliness of the camera vehicle ensuring that the space remains lenses regularly. clear throughout the manoeuvre. High pressure jet wash In some circumstances, the sensors may When washing your vehicle, keep the not detect small obstacles located in their nozzle at least 12 inches (30 cm) from the blind spots. cameras.

With the engine running: F In the Driving menu, select the "Driving Park Assist The Park Assist system cannot work with functions" tab, then "Panoramic visual aid". the engine off. This system provides active assistance with On display of the menu, select one of the three parking: it detects a parking space then views: operates the steering system to park in this "Front camera". space. 6 With a manual gearbox, the driver manages "360 camera". the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch. "Rear camera". With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the The selected view comes up in the instrument driver manages the accelerator, brakes and panel. gears. During phases of entry into and exit from The display disappears from the a parking space, the system provides visual The Park Assist system provides assistance for instrument panel above 9 mph (15 km/h). and audible information to the driver in order the following manoeuvres: to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be A. Parallel parking. necessary to move forwards and backwards B. Exit from a parallel parking space. Function deactivation more than once. C. Bay parking. F Accelerate to over 19 mph (30 km/h).

181 Driving

During manoeuvring phases, the steering The sequence of manoeuvres and the The parking sensors function is wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold driving instructions are displayed in the not available during parking space the steering wheel, do not put your hands instrument panel. measurement. It intervenes later when between the spokes of the steering wheel. manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle The assistance is activated: Watch out for any object that could block is approaching an obstacle: the audible the display of this symbol and the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarves, signal becomes continuous when the a speed limit indicate that ties, etc.) - injury risk! obstacle is less than thirty centimetres the steering manoeuvres are away. controlled by the system: do not If you have deactivated the parking touch the steering wheel. sensors, they are automatically When the Park Assist is active, it prevents The assistance is deactivated: reactivated during assisted parking the Stop & Start going into STOP mode. the display of this symbol manoeuvres. In STOP mode, activating Park Assist indicates that the steering restarts the engine. manoeuvres are no longer controlled by the system: you must take control of the Activation of Park Assist deactivates the The Park Assist system takes control steering. Blind Spot Detection. of the assistance for a maximum of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you think that your vehicle is not positioned Operation correctly, you should then take control of You should always check the surroundings the steering to carry out the manoeuvre. of your vehicle before starting Assistance with parallel parking a manoeuvre. manoeuvres

F When you have found a parking space.

F Press this button.

182 Driving

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the system.

F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from F Limit the speed of the vehicle to the row of parked vehicles. a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter parallel parking space" on the touch screen.

To enter a parking space, the system does 6 not identify spaces that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle.

F Select reverse, release the steering wheel F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph the system finds a free space. (7 km/h).

183 Driving

Assistance in exiting a parallel F Engage reverse or forward gear and release parking space the steering wheel.

F When you want to leave a parallel parking space, start the engine.

F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in F With the vehicle stationary, progress. press this button. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in forwards and backwards, aided by the progress. Without exceeding 3 mph warnings from the "Parking sensors" This indicator lamp comes on in (5 km/h), move forwards and backwards, system, until the end of the manoeuvre is the instrument panel to confirm the aided by the warnings from the "Parking indicated. activation of the system. sensors" system, until the indication of the F Press "Exit parking space" on end of the manoeuvre. the touch screen.

F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's F Operate the direction indicator for the exit The assistance is deactivated: you can take front wheels are clear of the parking space. side chosen. over control. 184 Driving

At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.

Assistance with bay parking manoeuvres

F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move forwards slowly until a message is parking side chosen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible measurement function. You should drive at signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from F Once you have found a parking the row of parked vehicles. area, press this button.

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the system. 6 F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter bay parking space" on the touch screen. F Select reverse, release the steering wheel F Drive slowly following the instructions until and start moving without exceeding 4 mph the system finds a free space. (7 km/h).

When several successive bays are found, the vehicle will be directed towards the last one.

185 Driving

- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park stated limit, Assist system is automatically deactivated - when the driver interrupts movement of the once the rear of the vehicle is within steering wheel, 20 inches (50 cm) of an obstacle. - after 4 manoeuvre cycles, - on opening the driver's door, - if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle. During parking and exit from parking The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes manoeuvres, the reversing camera off and a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in function may come into operation. It The driver should then take back control of the progress. facilitates monitoring of the surroundings vehicle's steering. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow of the vehicle, by displaying additional the instructions displayed in the instrument information in the instrument panel. panel, aided by the warnings from the For more information on the Reversing If the system is deactivated during "Parking sensors" system, until the end of camera, refer to the corresponding a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate the manoeuvre is indicated. section. it to repeat the measurement.

Switching off Deactivation The system is switched off automatically: The system is deactivated by pressing the - when towing a trailer, connected electrically, control. - if the driver's door is opened, The system is deactivated automatically: - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph - on switching off the ignition, (70 km/h). - if the engine stalls, To switch the system off for a prolonged period, - if no manoeuvre is performed within contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified 5 minutes of selecting the type of At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp workshop. manoeuvre in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during by a message and an audible signal. a manoeuvre, The assistance is deactivated: you can take - if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is over control. triggered, 186 Driving Operating faults High pressure jet washing When washing your vehicle, keep the lance at least 12 inches (30 cm) away from the sensors. In the event of a fault, this warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, accompanied by an audible signal.

If the fault occurs during the use of the system, the warning lamp goes off.

In the event of a fault with the power steering, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the space is too great, the system may not be able to measure the space. 6 Any object projecting beyond the dimensions of the vehicle (e.g. a ladder on the roof or a towball) will not be taken into account by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, ice or snow. In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

187 FILL UP WITH CONFIDENCE

WITH TOTAL QUARTZ For more than 45 years, TOTAL and CITROËN have shared common LUBRICANTS values: excellence, creativity and technological innovation. It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants adapted to CITROËN engines, making them even more fuel efficient and protective of the environment. TOTAL and CITROËN test the reliability and the performance of their products during motorsport races in extreme conditions. Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants to maintain your vehicle, this is your assurance of optimum durability and performance from your engine. Practical information Compatibility of fuels

Fuel used for petrol engines Diesel fuel that meets standard The only Diesel additives authorised The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that for use are those that meet the that conform to current and future European meets standard EN14214 (possibly B715000 standard. standards and which can be obtained from containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl filling stations: Ester). Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets Diesel at low temperature standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel Petrol that meets standard EN228, At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the that meets standard EN14214 (possibly mixed with a biofuel that meets formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl standard EN15376. fuels could result in an abnormal operation Ester). of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard recommend using winter-type Diesel fuel and EN16709 can be used in your Diesel keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full. The only petrol additives authorised engine. However, this use, even If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C for use are those that meet the occasional, requires strict application of (+5°F) the engine has problems starting, B715001 standard. the special servicing conditions referred just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated to as "Arduous conditions". workshop for a little while.

For more information, contact a CITROËN Fuel used for Diesel Travelling abroad engines dealer or a qualified workshop. Certain fuels could damage your vehicle's 7 The Diesel engines are compatible with engine. biofuels that conform to current and future In certain countries, the use of a particular European standards and which can be The use of any other type of (bio) fuel fuel may be required (specific octane rating, obtained from filling stations: (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited Diesel fuel that meets standard operation of the engine. (risk of damage to the engine and fuel EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets For any additional information, contact a dealer. system). standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

189 Practical information

Opening the filler flap may create a noise F Hold it in this position throughout the filling Fuel caused by an inrush of air. This is entirely operation. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 57 litres normal and results from the sealing of the fuel F Push the filler flap to close it. (petrol) or 55 litres (Diesel). system. If you are filling your tank to the top, do not continue after the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle; Low fuel level this could cause malfunctions. When the low fuel level is reached, Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, this warning lamp in the instrument a device which helps to reduce the level of panel comes on, accompanied by harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. an audible warning, a message and For petrol engines, you must use unleaded the last bar of the fuel gauge lights fuel. up orange. The filler neck is narrower, allowing only unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced. When it first comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank. Until sufficient fuel has been added, this If you have put in the wrong fuel for warning lamp appears every time the ignition your vehicle, you must have the fuel is switched on, accompanied by an audible tank drained and filled with the correct warning and a message. This audible warning fuel before starting the engine. and this message are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0". To refuel in complete safety: Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running F You must switch off the engine. out. F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear Fuel cut-off edge of the flap to open it (the filler cap is Refilling a part of it). Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that F Take care to select the pump that delivers cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the the correct type of fuel for your vehicle. impact. filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use, F Insert the nozzle so as to push in the metal depending on your engine. non-return flap. With Stop & Start, never refuel with the Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in F Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as engine in STOP mode; you must switch order to be registered by the fuel gauge. far as possible before starting to refuel (risk off the ignition with the "START/STOP" of blowback). button.

190 Practical information

Misfuel prevention (Diesel) Travelling abroad Installation tips (Depending on the country of sale.) As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be F If you have to fit the chains during a journey, Mechanical device which prevents filling the different in other countries, the presence stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps of the misfuel prevention device may make of the road. avoid the risk of engine damage that can result refuelling impossible. F Apply the parking brake and position any from filling with the wrong fuel. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent misfuel protection, so before travelling movement of your vehicle. abroad, we recommend that you check F Fit the chains following the instructions with the CITROËN dealer network, provided by the manufacturer. whether your vehicle is suitable for the F Move off gently and drive for a few Operation fuel pumps in the country in which you moments, without exceeding 31 mph intend to travel. (50 km/h). F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.

Snow chains It is strongly recommended that before In wintry conditions, snow chains you leave, you practise fitting the snow improve traction as well as the chains on a level and dry surface. behaviour of the vehicle when When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into braking. Avoid driving with snow chains on roads the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes that have been cleared of snow to avoid into contact with the flap. The system remains damaging your vehicle's tyres and the closed and prevents filling. road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with 7 Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type Snow chains must be fitted only to the alloy wheels, check that no part of the filler nozzle. front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, Take account of the legislation in force in do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in your country on the use of snow chains direct contact with the flap of the misfuel and the maximum authorised speed. prevention device and pour slowly.

191 Practical information

Only use the chains designed to be fitted to the Use towing devices and their genuine Observe the maximum authorised towable type of wheels fitted to your vehicle: harnesses approved by CITROËN. It weight, indicated on your vehicle's is recommended that the installation registration certificate, the manufacturer's be performed by a CITROËN dealer or label as well as in the Technical data a qualified workshop. section of this guide. Original tyre size Chain type If the towing device is not fitted by Complying with the maximum a CITROËN dealer, it must still be authorised nose weight (towball) fitted in accordance with the vehicle also includes the use of accessories 205/60 R16 Maximum link size: manufacturer's instructions. (bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.). 9 mm 205/55 R17 Important: for versions equipped with the motorised tailgate with "Hands-Free THULE K-Summit Tailgate Access" function, if a towing 225/45 R18 K34 model Observe the legislation in force in the device other than a genuine CITROËN exclusively country in which you are driving. one is installed, it is imperative to For more information on snow chains, contact visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. workshop to recalibrate the detection system: risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" Access" function failure. function Towing device Certain driving or manoeuvring aid To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate functions are automatically disabled if an when using the towing device: Load distribution - please deactivate this function in advance F approved towing system is used. Distribute the load in the trailer so that the in your vehicle's configuration menu, heaviest items are as close as possible to - or remove the electronic key from the the axle and the nose weight approaches the recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. maximum permitted without exceeding it. Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. The maximum towed load must be reduced by 10% for every 1,000 metres of altitude.

192 Practical information Blanking plug F Fit the end of the towball into the carrier underneath the rear bumper, as far as it can In the event of recovery, it is essential to remove go. the blanking plug if your vehicle has one. To do this, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

The blanking plug is located behind the lower air intake grille. F Press and hold control A on the towball. F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing trigger B. Towing system with F Make sure that the towball is correctly secured in place. The two pins must be in quickly detachable towball contact with the carrier notches and trigger No tools are required to install or remove the B must be returned to the "locking" position. towball on this genuine towbar system. F Install the protective cover and clip it into place by turning it anti-clockwise.

Trailers with LED lamps are not compatible with the wiring harness of this device. F Before fitting the towball, check that the contact points, shown by arrows, are clean. Use a clean and soft cloth. Fitting 7

F Connect the trailer plug to the 13 pin socket next to the carrier. F Secure the trailer by connecting its safety cable to the hoop on the carrier. F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove the protective cover from the carrier. 193 Practical information

Removing If the towball is not locked, the trailer can detach. This may cause an accident. Always lock the towball in accordance with the descriptions. Observe the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. Remove the towball if it is not being used. F Clip the protective cover to the carrier Before starting the vehicle, check that the underneath the bumper. trailer lamps are working correctly. F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by Before setting off, check the adjustment of turning it clockwise. the headlamp beam height. Maximum weight authorised on the towing device: 70 kg. For more information on the Weights of your vehicle, refer to the associated section. Carrier systems (box or bicycle carrier). Always comply with the maximum load authorised on the towing system: if it is exceeded, this system may detach from F Press and hold control A on the towball. the vehicle and thus cause a serious F Unlock the locking mechanism by pressing accident. trigger B.

F Press trigger B and remove the towball by pulling it towards you. 194 Practical information

Load reduction mode If a telephone call is being made at this Changing a wiper blade System which manages the use of certain time, it will be maintained for around functions according to the level of charge 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free Before removing a front remaining in the battery. system of your audio system. wiper blade When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as air conditioning, Exiting the mode heated rear screen, etc. These functions will be automatically restored The deactivated functions are reactivated the next time the vehicle is used. automatically as soon as conditions permit. In order to restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: - for less than ten minutes, to use the Energy economy mode equipment for approximately five minutes, System which manages the duration of use of - for more than ten minutes, to use the F Within one minute after switching off the certain functions to conserve a sufficient level equipment for up to approximately thirty ignition, operate the wiper control stalk to of charge in the battery. minutes. position the wiper blades vertically on the After the engine has stopped, you can Let the engine run for the duration specified to windscreen. still use functions such as the audio and ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. or telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the F More than one minute after switching off the beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for engine in order to charge the battery. ignition, straighten the arms manually. a maximum combined duration of about forty minutes. Removing F Lift the corresponding wiper arm. 7 Switching to this mode F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it. A message appears in the instrument panel A flat battery prevents the engine from screen indicating that the vehicle has switched starting. Refitting to economy mode and the active functions are For more information on the 12 V battery, put on standby. refer to the corresponding section. F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the arm. F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

195 Practical information After refitting a front wiper Version without longitudinal Version with longitudinal blade bars bars F Switch on the ignition. F Operate the wiper control stalk again to park the wiper blades.

The replacement of wiper arms should be carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Roof bars When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing As a safety measure and to avoid points located on the roof frame. These points damaging the roof, it is essential to use are masked by the vehicle doors when closed. You must fit the transverse bars to the the transverse bars approved for your The roof bar fixings include a stud which should longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated vehicle. be fitted to the opening in each fixing point. by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.

Observe the fitting instructions and the Recommendations conditions of use in the user guide supplied F Distribute the load evenly, avoiding with the bars. overloading on one side. F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof. F Secure the load firmly and fit a warning flag if it overhangs the vehicle. F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more susceptible to the effects of side winds (the stability of the vehicle may be affected). F Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed.

196 Practical information

Maximum load, distributed over the roof Before fitting or removing a screen, Removing bars, for a loading height not exceeding ensure that the engine is off and the F Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each 40 cm: 80 kg. cooling fan has stopped. of the fixings of each screen in turn. As this value may be changed, please verify the maximum load quoted in the user guide supplied with the roof bars. Fitting If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the It is essential to remove the very cold speed of the vehicle to the profile of the climate screen (or screens): road to avoid damaging the roof bars and - when the exterior temperature exceeds the fixings on the vehicle. 10°C, Be sure to refer to national legislation in - when towing, order to comply with the regulations for - at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). transporting objects which are longer than the vehicle. Vision 360 system The pre-cut section must be removed before fitting the screen on the front bumper, in order to be able to release the When carrying long objects, it is camera. recommended that the motorised tailgate When the very cold climate screen is function is deactivated. present, the camera image is slightly altered. Very cold climate screen(s) 7 (Depending on the country where the product is sold.) Removable screen(s) which prevent snow F Offer up the corresponding very cold accumulating at the radiator cooling fan. climate screen to the lower or upper section Depending on the version, you have one or two of the front bumper. screens. F Press around its edge to engage the fixing clips of each screen one by one.

197 Practical information

Bonnet When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with Opening care (risk of burns), using the protected area. When the bonnet is open, take care not to damage the safety catch. Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions.

Before doing anything under the bonnet, F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it deactivate the Stop & Start system to in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode. Closing F Take the stay out of the support slot. F Clip the stay in its housing. F Lower the bonnet and release it near the F Open the front left door. end of its travel. F Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully The cooling fan may start after door aperture, towards you. latched. switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.

The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents opening of the bonnet when Because of the presence of electrical the left-hand front door is shut. equipment under the bonnet, it is recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited.

F Lift the lever and raise the bonnet. 198 Practical information

5. Fusebox. Engine compartment Take care when working under the bonnet, 6. Air filter. This engine is shown as an example. as certain areas of the engine may be 7. Engine oil dipstick. The positions of the following elements may extremely hot (risk of burns) and the 8. Engine oil filler cap. change: cooling fan could start at any time (even - Air filter. 9. Remote earth point. with the ignition off). - Engine oil dipstick. 10. Priming pump* - Engine oil filler cap. * Depending on engine. - Priming pump. Used products The Diesel fuel system operates under very high pressure. Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or Petrol All work on this circuit must be carried out fluids with the skin. only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Most of these fluids are harmful to health workshop. or indeed very corrosive.

Checking levels Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Check all of these levels regularly, in line with Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them a qualified workshop and dispose of up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. Diesel it in the containers reserved for this If a level drops significantly, have the purpose. corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. 7 Engine oil level The liquid must comply with the The check is carried out either when 1. Screenwash and headlamp wash manufacturer's recommendations and with the ignition is switched in using the reservoir. the vehicle's engine. oil level indicator in the instrument 2. Engine coolant reservoir. panel for vehicles equipped with an 3. Brake fluid reservoir. electric gauge, or using the dipstick. 4. Battery/Fuses. 199 Practical information

To ensure that the reading is correct, your Topping up the engine oil level vehicle must be parked on a level surface The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the with the engine stopped for more than corresponding underbonnet layout view. 30 minutes. F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler A = MAX opening. It is normal to top up the oil level between B = MIN F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any two services (or oil changes). CITROËN spills on engine components (risk of fire). recommends that you check the level, and top F Wait a few minutes before checking the up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). level again using the dipstick. F Add more oil if necessary. F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil Checking using the dipstick If you find that the level is above the A mark or filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. The location of the dipstick is shown in the below the B mark, do not start the engine. corresponding underbonnet layout view. - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and damage to the engine), contact a CITROËN pull it out completely. dealer or a qualified workshop. F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must non-fluffy cloth. top up the engine oil. After topping up the oil, the check when F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then switching on the ignition with the oil level pull it out again to make the visual check: Oil grade indicator in the instrument panel is not the correct level is between marks A and B. valid during the 30 minutes after topping Before topping up the oil or changing the oil, up. check that the oil is the correct grade for your engine and conforms to the manufacturer's recommendations. Engine oil change In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emissions control system, never use additives in the engine oil.

200 Practical information Brake fluid level To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to Diesel fuel additive level top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around The fluid level should be close to the the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to (Diesel with particle filter) "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the allow the pressure to drop. brake pad wear. Once the pressure has dropped, remove the The additive reservoir low level is cap and top up to the required level. indicated by fixed illumination of this Fluid specification warning lamp, accompanied by an The cooling fan may start after audible signal and a message that The fluid must conform to the manufacturer's switching off the engine: take care the particle filter additive level is recommendations. with articles and clothing that might be too low. caught by the fan blades. Topping up Fluid specification This additive must be topped up without delay Coolant level by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's Check the coolant level regularly. recommendations. It is normal to top up the fluid Level of AdBlue between two services. Screenwash/headlamp An alert is triggered once the reserve level is The check and top-up must only be done with wash level low reached. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per the engine cold. In the case of vehicles fitted with regulations, you must top up with AdBlue. A low coolant level presents a risk of serious headlamp washers, when the fluid damage to your engine. reservoir low level is reached this For more information on AdBlue and the SCR The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" warning lamp comes on in the 7 system, and, in particular, topping up the tank, mark but should never exceed it. instrument panel, accompanied by refer to the corresponding section. If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, an audible signal and a message. it is essential to top up. The warning lamp comes on when the ignition When the engine is hot, the temperature of the is switched on, or every time the stalk is coolant is regulated by the fan. operated, until the reservoir is refilled. In addition, as the cooling system is The next time you stop, have the screenwash/ pressurised, wait at least one hour after headlamp wash reservoir topped up. switching off the engine before carrying out any work. 201 Practical information Checks Air filter Particle filter (Diesel) Unless otherwise indicated, check these Depending on the environment The start of saturation of the particle components in accordance with the (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the filter is signalled by the temporary manufacturer's service schedule and according use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), illumination of this warning lamp to your engine. replace it twice as often if accompanied by a message warning Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN necessary. of the risk of the filter clogging up. dealer or a qualified workshop.

12 V battery Passenger compartment Traffic conditions permitting, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least The battery does not require any filter 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp maintenance. Depending on the environment goes off. However, check regularly that the (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates terminals are correctly tightened use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), a low Diesel additive level. (versions without quick release terminals) replace it twice as often if For more information on Checking levels, and that the connections are clean. necessary. refer to the corresponding section.

For more information and the precautions to take before starting work on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding A clogged passenger compartment On a new vehicle, the first particle section. filter may have an adverse effect on filter regeneration operations may be the performance of the air conditioning accompanied by a "burning" smell, which system and generate undesirable odours. is perfectly normal. Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Following prolonged operation of the fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of vehicle at very low speed or at idle, specific technology and specification. Oil filter you may, in exceptional circumstances, Its replacement should be carried out notice the emission of water vapour at the Change the oil filter each time the only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified exhaust on acceleration. This does not engine oil is changed. workshop. affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

202 Practical information Manual gearbox Brake disc wear The pressures given on the tyre pressure label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for The gearbox does not require any more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles maintenance (no oil change). For information on checking brake (10 kilometres) at more than 31 mph (50 km/h), disc wear, contact a CITROËN 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the values dealer or a qualified workshop. given on the label. Under-inflation increases fuel consumption. Non-compliant tyre pressure causes premature Automatic gearbox wear on tyres and has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road holding – Risk of an accident! The gearbox does not require any Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces maintenance (no oil change). Electric parking brake braking efficiency and control of the vehicle's steering. Regular inspections of the condition This system does not require any of tyres (tread and sides) and rims are specific check. However, in the recommended as well as making sure that Brake pads event of a problem, have the system valves are fitted. checked by a CITROËN dealer or Using different size wheels and tyres from Brake wear depends on the style a qualified workshop. those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, of driving, particularly in the case wheel rotation, ground clearance and the of vehicles used in town, over short speedometer reading and have an adverse distances. It may be necessary to effect on road holding. For more information on the Electric have the condition of the brakes Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles parking brake, refer to the corresponding checked, even between vehicle can cause the ESC to mistime. services. section. 7 Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake Wheels and tyres pads are worn. The pressure must be checked on all tyres, including the spare wheel, when the tyres are "cold", at least once a month and before a long journey.

203 Practical information

Only use products recommended by SCR system Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a system CITROËN or products of equivalent quality Using a fluid called AdBlue® that contains required by regulations prevents starting and specification. urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of the engine. In order to optimise the operation of of nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and If the SCR system is defective, the level of components as important as those in the water, which are harmless to health and the emissions from your vehicle will no longer braking system, CITROËN selects and environment. meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle offers very specific products. becomes polluting. After washing the vehicle, dampness, or In the event of a confirmed fault with the The AdBlue® is contained in in wintry conditions, ice can form on the SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN a special tank holding about brake discs and pads: braking efficiency dealer or a qualified workshop as soon 17 litres. may be reduced. Make light brake as possible: after a running distance of applications to dry and defrost the brakes. 685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be triggered automatically to prevent engine Its capacity allows a driving range of around starting. 12,500 miles (20,000 km). An alert system is In either case, a range indicator gives you triggered automatically once the reserve level the distance you can travel before the is reached: you can then drive for a further ® vehicle is immobilised. AdBlue (BlueHDi engines) 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is empty. To respect the environment and ensure compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without adversely affecting the performance or fuel For more information on the Warning and consumption of Diesel engines, CITROËN indicator lamps and associated alerts, has taken the decision to equip its vehicles refer to the corresponding section. with a system that associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter ® (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. Freezing of the AdBlue AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below around -11°C. The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving in very cold conditions.

204 Practical information Topping up the AdBlue® You can obtain AdBlue® from a CITROËN Precautions for use dealer or a qualified workshop. Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This liquid included in every routine service on your is non-flammable, colourless and odourless vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified You can also visit a petrol station (when kept in a cool place). workshop. equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially In the event of contact with the skin, wash the Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it designed for passenger vehicles (for those affected area with soap and water. In the event may be necessary to top up the fluid between versions with access to the AdBlue® tank of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the services, more particularly if an alert (warning via the fuel filler flap). eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye lamps and a message) signals the requirement. wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get workshop. medical attention. ® If you envisage topping up yourself, please Never top up from an AdBlue dispenser If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth read the following warnings carefully. reserved for heavy goods vehicles. with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions (at high temperature, for example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour. Recommendations on Supply of AdBlue® Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous storage membranes (eyes, nose and throat). AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and ® It is recommended that the AdBlue is deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in topped up as soon as the first alert is a cool place and protected from direct sunlight. issued indicating that the reserve level has Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept been reached. for at least a year. ® If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it Keep AdBlue out of the reach of children, 7 in its original container or bottle. In order to ensure that the SCR system has completely thawed out. operates correctly: - Use only AdBlue® liquid that meets the ISO 22241 standard. ® Procedure - Never transfer AdBlue to another Never keep containers or bottles of container: it would lose its purity. AdBlue® in your vehicle. Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure - Never dilute AdBlue® with water. that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.

205 Practical information

In winter, check that the temperature of the F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch Important: in the event of a top-up after vehicle is above -11°C. If not, due to freezing, off the engine. a breakdown because of a lack of the AdBlue® cannot be poured into the tank. AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes Park your vehicle somewhere warmer for a few before switching on the ignition, without hours before topping up. opening the driver's door, locking the vehicle, introducing the key into the ignition switch, or introducing the key of In the event of an AdBlue® breakdown, the ​Keyless Entry and Starting system confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue: into the passenger compartment. Starting impossible", you must top up with Switch on the ignition, then wait for at least 5 litres. 10 seconds before starting the engine.

® ® Access to the AdBlue tank via Never pour AdBlue into the Diesel fuel the boot tank. Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation included in every routine service on your If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified any spillages on the side of the body, rinse workshop. immediately with cold water or wipe with Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it a damp cloth. may be necessary to top up the fluid between If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off services, as soon as an alert (warning lamps using a sponge and hot water. and a message) indicates it. You can go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. F To gain access to the AdBlue® tank, raise If you intend to do the topping-up yourself, the floor of the boot or, for the 7-seater read the following procedure carefully. version, fold down the seat of the 3rd row on the right. The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies topping up.

206 Practical information

Important: To prevent the AdBlue® tank from overflowing, it is recommended: F To top up between 10 and 13 litres using containers of AdBlue®. Or F Without pressing, turn the black cap F If filling in a service station, stop after a quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off. Read the following procedure carefully to the third automatic shut-off of the F Turn the blue cap anti-clockwise and lift it be able to top up properly. nozzle. off. F Obtain a non-drip bottle of AdBlue®. After F Press the "START/STOP" button to switch first checking the use-by date, carefully off the engine. read the instructions for use on the label F With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler ® F After refilling, carry out these same before pouring the contents of the bottle into flap open, turn the AdBlue blue filler cap operations in reverse order. your vehicle's AdBlue® tank. anti-clockwise. F After filling, perform the same operations in F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue®. After first reverse order. checking the use-by date, carefully read the instructions for use on the label before Access to the AdBlue® tank via pouring the contents of the container into the fuel filler flap your vehicle's AdBlue® tank. A blue cap under the fuel filler flap indicates Or ® access to the AdBlue® tank. F Insert the AdBlue pump nozzle and fill the tank until the nozzle stops automatically. 7

207 In the event of a breakdown Warning triangle Placing the triangle on the Access to the kit This safety device is used in addition to the road hazard warning lamps. F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as Its presence in the vehicle may be mandatory. required by the legislation in force in your country.

Temporary puncture repair kit

Scan the QR code on page 3 to view explanatory videos.

Comprising a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of The kit is stowed in a bag inside the storage A space is provided for the storage of the a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest box located at the foot of the second row triangle in the interior trim of the tailgate. garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which passenger seat. could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder. Before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest. The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of the compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture Refer to the instructions on assembly/ repair. unfolding indicated in the user guide supplied with the triangle.

208 In the event of a breakdown Composition of the kit F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be repaired, and place it in a clean area.

F Connect the pipe from the compressor to 1. 12 V compressor, with built-in pressure the bottle of sealant. gauge. 2. Bottle of sealant, with built-in hose. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which F 3. Speed limit sticker. Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant have penetrated into the tyre. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly. Repair procedure F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. F Park the vehicle without obstructing any F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under traffic and apply the parking brake. the compressor. F Follow the safety instructions (hazard F Connect the compressor's electric plug to warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing the vehicle's 12 V socket. high visibility vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force in the country where you Only the 12 V socket located at the front of are driving. the vehicle can be used. F Switch off the ignition. 8 F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Affix the speed limit sticker. compressor. F Turn the sealant bottle over and secure it in the notch provided on the compressor.

209 In the event of a breakdown

The speed limit sticker must be secured If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's about 7 minutes, this indicates that the field of vision, to remind you that a wheel tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN is in temporary use. dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

F Place the switch in the "O" position. F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug F Drive immediately for approximately three The tyre inflation pressures are given on from the vehicle's 12 V socket. miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed this label. F Replace the cap on the valve. (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), F Remove the kit. to plug the puncture. F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant. F Stop to check the repair and measure the tyre pressure using the kit. F Switch on the ignition. Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph Take care, the sealant product is harmful (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired if swallowed and causes irritation to the using this type of kit. eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children. The use-by date of the fluid is marked on Checking/adjusting tyre the bottle. pressures After use, do not discard the bottle in standard waste, take it to a CITROËN You can also use the compressor, dealer or an authorised waste disposal without injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures. F Start the compressor by turning the switch site. Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of to the "l" position until the pressure of the tyre reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant product sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer is injected under pressure into the tyre; or a qualified workshop. F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and do not disconnect the pipe from the valve place it in a clean area. during this operation (risk of blowback).

210 In the event of a breakdown F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Start the compressor by placing the switch Spare wheel compressor. at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button located on the compressor pipe, near the valve connection. Procedure for changing a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after Scan the QR code on page 3 to view 7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is explanatory videos. not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly. Access to tooling F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under F Once the correct pressure is reached, put the compressor. the switch to the "O" position. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F Remove the kit then stow it. the vehicle's 12 V socket. F Switch on the ignition. Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km) with the repaired tyre; see a CITROËN Only the 12 V socket located at the front dealer or a qualified workshop to change of the vehicle can be used to power the the tyre. compressor.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres The tools are installed in the boot under the be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise floor. 8 the under-inflation detection system. Remove the boot carpet to access them. For more information on Tyre under- The tyre inflation pressures are given on inflation detection, refer to the this label. corresponding section.

211 In the event of a breakdown List of tools 4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. Access to the spare wheel Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy (Depending on equipment.) wheels. The spare wheel is located in the boot, under the floor. 5. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box). For adapting the wheelbrace to the special Taking out the wheel "security" bolts. 6. Towing eye and tool to open the front protective cover.

For more information on Towing, refer to the corresponding section.

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and may vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for any other purposes.

F Loosen the central nut. The jack must only be used to change F Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the Do not use any jack other than the one rear. supplied with this vehicle. F Take the wheel out of the boot. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, 1. Wheelbrace. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified For removing the wheel trim and the wheel workshop to obtain the correct jack for it. fastening bolts. The jack meets European standards, 2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except as defined in the Machinery Directive versions with manual gearbox). 2006/42/EC. 3. Jack with integrated handle. The jack does not require any Used to raise the vehicle. maintenance.

212 In the event of a breakdown

Putting the spare wheel back in Since the width of the spare wheel is place smaller than the width of the wheels of the vehicle, in the event of a puncture, the punctured wheel must be stored in the boot.

Spare wheel

One part of the tools can be accessed from the Procedure for changing a wheel with boot. a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare F Put the wheel back in its housing. The immobilisation chock 2 as well as the wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle. F Loosen the nut on the bolt by a few turns. wheelbrace extension 6 are stored in the right- F Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) hand section of the boot sill trim. in the middle of the wheel. Scan the QR code on page 3 to view The wheelbrace 1 and the towing eye 7 are F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks to explanatory videos. stored in the left-hand section of the boot sill retain the wheel correctly. trim.

Access to tooling The rest of the tools, the jack 3 and the wheel bolt cover removal tool 4, are stored in a box (Depending on version. The full set of tools is attached to the spare wheel. supplied with the spare wheel.) The assembly is secured under the vehicle by means of a winch carrier system. 8

F Put the box back in place in the centre of the wheel. 213 In the event of a breakdown List of tools 4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. Wheel with wheel trim Removes the wheel bolt covers on alloy (Depending on version. The full set of tools is wheels. When removing the wheel, first remove the supplied with the spare wheel.) 5. Socket for wheel security bolts (stored in trim using the wheelbrace 1 by pulling at the the glove box). valve aperture. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special When refitting the wheel, refit the trim "security" bolts. starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your 6. Wheelbrace extension. hand. For slackening/tightening the spare wheel winch cable carrier nut. 7. Towing eye and tool to open the front protective cover. Access to the spare wheel For more information on Towing, refer to the (Depending on version.) corresponding section.

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and may vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for any other purposes.

The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. Do not use any jack other than the one supplied with this vehicle. 1. Wheelbrace. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, The spare wheel is supported by a winch For removing the wheel trim and removing contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified carrier system underneath the vehicle. the wheel bolts. workshop to obtain the correct jack for it. 2. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (except The jack meets European standards, Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel for versions with manual gearbox). as defined in the Machinery Directive may be fixed underneath the vehicle. 3. Jack with integrated handle. 2006/42/EC. Used to raise the vehicle. The jack does not require any maintenance. 214 In the event of a breakdown

Taking out the spare wheel F Detach the assembly of wheel and box from the rear of the vehicle. F Fold back the concertina board and install the third row seat, on the left-hand side (if your vehicle is equipped with it). F Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to remove the fixing winch nut from the spare wheel.

F Press the tab, slide the lid on the box up to the middle and remove it to access the other tools (jack and alloy wheel bolt cover F Straighten the spare wheel to access tool removal tool). box (A). Tool storage F Put the tools back in the box and store the box in the boot of the vehicle. F With the extension 6 placed on the end of F Reel in the winch by turning the key in wheelbrace 1, "tighten" the nut to unwind the clockwise direction: once the cable is the winch cable until the spare wheel is completely reeled in, you should no longer flat on the ground. Unwind as much as feel any resistance. necessary in order to access the wheel F Store the rest of the tools in the storage easily. areas in the boot. 8 F Detach the connecting piece from the cover The wheel with the punctured tyre cannot of the tool box (B – C). be fitted under the vehicle. It must be F Pass the connecting piece through the stored in the boot. Use a cover to protect wheel hub to release it (D). the interior of the boot.

215 In the event of a breakdown

Putting the winch carrier and F Pass the connecting piece through the spare wheel back in place wheel hub (A).

F Replace the wheel/box assembly beneath the vehicle by "loosening" the winch control F Place the appropriate tools in the box and nut with the wheelbrace and extension. close the cover again. F Insert the connecting piece into the tool box F Tighten fully. When the cable is completely F Place the tool box on the ground. hole (B – C). reeled in, turning the nut no longer F Centre and position the spare wheel on the encounters resistance. When the spare wheel is fitted in place of tool box (D). F Check that the wheel is properly flattened a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch against the floor. and tool box must be refitted underneath the vehicle again before restarting.

F Straighten the wheel.

F Insert the centring guide into the wheel hub. F Place the wheel/box assembly beneath the rear of the vehicle.

216 In the event of a breakdown Removing a wheel List of operations F Place the foot of the jack 3 on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the front A or rear B jacking point provided on the Parking the vehicle underbody, whichever is closest to the Stop the vehicle where it does not block wheel to be changed. traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. Ensure that the jack is stable. If the Apply the parking brake, unless it is ground is slippery or loose, the jack may programmed in automatic mode; switch slip or collapse – Risk of injury! off the ignition and put the vehicle into first Ensure that the jack is positioned only at gear* so as to block the wheels. one of the jacking points A or B under the Check that the braking warning lamp and vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's the P warning lamp in the parking brake contact surface is centred on the head of control lever come on. the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle could be For more safety, position the chock damaged and/or the jack could collapse – 2 against the wheel opposite the one you Risk of injury! are replacing. F Remove the bolt cover(s) using the tool 4 Make absolutely certain that all the (according to equipment). occupants have left the vehicle and are F Fit security socket 5 on wheelbrace 1 to waiting in a safe area. slacken the security bolt (according to Never go underneath a vehicle raised equipment). using a jack; use an axle stand. F Slacken the other bolts (no more than a 1/4 turn) using the wheelbrace 1 only.

Do not use: - the jack for any other purpose than lifting the vehicle, - a jack other than the one supplied by 8 the manufacturer. F Extend the jack 3 until its head comes into * position P for the automatic gearbox contact with jacking point A or B used, with contact surface A or B on the vehicle correctly engaged with the central part of the head of the jack. 217 In the event of a breakdown Fitting a wheel List of operations

F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground The jack must only be used to change F Put the wheel in place on the hub. to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop. easily. F Pre-tighten the security bolt using The jack does not require any wheelbrace 1 fitted with security socket 5 maintenance. (according to equipment). F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the The jack meets European standards, wheelbrace 1 only. as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

F Remove the bolts and keep them in a clean place. F Remove the wheel. F Lower the vehicle again fully. F Fold jack 3 and detach it.

218 In the event of a breakdown

After changing a wheel

With a "space-saver" type spare wheel

The following is recommended: F Tighten the security bolt using the - deactivate some driving aid functions wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise The tyre inflation pressures are given on 5 (according to equipment). control with Stop function, etc.), as this label. F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace indicated on the label attached to the 1 only. wheel, F Refit the wheel bolt cover(s) (according to - do not exceed the maximum equipment). authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). F Store the tools in the box.

Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel workshop as soon as possible to have the If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, tightness of the bolts and the pressure of when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is the spare wheel checked. normal to notice that the washers do not Have the punctured tyre examined. After come into contact with the "space-saver" inspection, the technician will advise you spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it conical contact of each bolt. must be replaced. 8

219 In the event of a breakdown

Changing a bulb In some weather conditions (e.g. low Front lamps temperature or humidity), the presence Model with xenon headlamps The lamps have polycarbonate lenses with of misting on the internal surface of the a protective coating: glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is F do not clean them using a dry or normal; it disappears after the lamps have abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent been on for a few minutes. or solvent product, F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, F when using a high pressure washer Risk of electrocution on persistent marks, do not keep the Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be replaced lance directed towards the lamps or by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified their edges for too long, so as not to workshop. damage their protective coating and seals.

Light-emitting diodes (LED) For the replacement of this type of bulb, you must contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Changing a bulb should only be done after 1. Dipped beam headlamps (D5S-25W). the lamp has been switched off for several 2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). minutes (risk of serious burns). Daytime running lamps/sidelamps F Do not touch the bulb directly with your 3. (6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs). fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet 4. Direction indicators (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the (6 light-emitting diodes – LEDs). headlamp. 5. Foglamps (H11-55W). Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

220 In the event of a breakdown

Model with halogen headlamps Directional dipped beam F Remove the protective plastic cover by headlamps (xenon model) pulling the tab. F Push the connector. F Pull the bulb to change it. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.

Dipped beam headlamps (halogen model)

Replacement of D5S xenon bulbs must be done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as there is a risk of electrocution. In case of a fault in one of the two D5S bulbs, it is recommended to also replace the bulb on the opposite side. 1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps Main beam headlamps (xenon (4 light-emitting diodes – LEDs). model) F Turn the protective plastic cover to remove 4. Direction indicators (PWY24W). it. (light emitting diodes – LEDs). F Disconnect the connector. 5. Foglamps (H11-55W). F Unhook the clips. F Pull the bulb to change it. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order. For bulbs with lugs (type H7, etc.), take 8 care to observe their correct installation so as to ensure the best lighting performance.

221 In the event of a breakdown

F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top. Main beam headlamps (halogen model) Quicker flashing of the direction indicator F Remove the two screws to remove the unit. light (left or right) indicates that one of F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn. the bulbs on the corresponding side has F Remove the bulb holder. failed. F Change the faulty bulb. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order, The direction indicator bulb is located below pressing on the finisher to refit it. the headlamp. F Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise a quarter of a turn. F Remove the bulb holder. F Change the faulty bulb. Door mirror spotlamps To reassemble, proceed in reverse order. F Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling the tab. Direction indicators (light- F Push the connector. emitting diodes – LEDs) F Pull the bulb to change it. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order. For the replacement of this type of lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Direction indicators

Front foglamps You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of the light-emitting diode – LED.

Integrated direction indicator side repeaters You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.

222 In the event of a breakdown Rear lamps Model with bulb lamps

F Remove the access cover. 3. Sidelamps (5W5). 4. Brake lamps (P21/W). 5. Direction indicators (WY16W). 1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). 6. Reversing lamp (W16W). 2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W).

Model with LED lamps Light-emitting diodes – LEDs

For replacement, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A. Tailgate lamps F Disconnect the connector. F Identify the faulty bulb. F Carefully remove the lamp from the outside 8 F Open the boot. by pushing the retaining clip B.

3. Brake lamps/sidelamps (light-emitting diodes – LEDs). 4. Reversing lamps (W16W). 5. Direction indicators (PY21W). 223 In the event of a breakdown

For the replacement of the bulbs of the Model with LED lamps sidelamps and of the brake lamps: F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti- clockwise and remove it. F Change the bulb.

To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.

Model with LED lamps Rear lamps

3. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs). 4. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs). 5. Direction indicators (PY21W). 6. Reversing lamps (light emitting diodes – LEDs).

Light-emitting diodes – LEDs

1. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). Model with bulb lamps For replacement, contact a CITROËN 2. Sidelamps/foglamps (P21/5W). dealer or a qualified workshop. For the replacement of the bulbs of the reversing lamp and of the direction indicators: F Use the "universal" type tweezers to turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-clockwise and remove it. F Change the bulb.

224 In the event of a breakdown

Model with bulb lamps Model with bulb lamps

F Remove the three lamp fixing screws A. 3. Sidelamps (W5W). F Disconnect the connector. 4. Brake lamps/sidelamps (P21W). F Carefully remove the lamp from its location. Direction indicators, sidelamps 5. Direction indicators (WY16W). F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti- and foglamps 6. Reversing lamp. (W16W). clockwise and remove it. F Change the bulb. Tailgate lamp To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.

Model with LED lamps 8 For access, pass your hand under the bumper. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and remove it. Identify the faulty bulb. F Change the bulb. F Open the boot. To reassemble, proceed in reverse order. F Remove the access cover. 225 In the event of a breakdown

You can also contact a CITROËN dealer or F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut- a qualified workshop for the replacement of outs in the lens. these bulbs. F Push it outwards to unclip it. F Remove the lens. F Change the faulty bulb. Third brake lamp (light-emitting To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place. diodes – LEDs)

Changing a fuse

Access to tooling F Open the glove box The extraction tweezers are fitted in the F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, dashboard fuses compartment. then right. F Completely remove the cover by carefully pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow. F Remove the tweezers.

For the replacement of this type of lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Changing a fuse workshop. Before changing a fuse, it is necessary to: Number plate lamps (W5W) F identify the cause of the failure and correct it, F switch off all electrical loads, F immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition, F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top right, F identify the defective fuse using the existing then left, allocation tables and diagrams. F Completely remove the cover by carefully pulling it in the axis indicated by the arrow, F Remove the tweezers.

226 In the event of a breakdown

To remove or fit a fuse, it is essential to: Installing electrical accessories Access to the fuses F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of its filament, Your vehicle's electrical system is F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse designed to operate with standard or of the same rating (same colour); using optional equipment. a different rating could cause faults (risk of Before installing other electrical fire). equipment or accessories on your vehicle, If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified have the vehicle's electrical system checked by workshop. a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

CITROËN will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by CITROËN and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the Good Failed additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

Fuses in the dashboard Tweezers The two fuseboxes are located in the lower 8 dashboard (left-hand side). Replacing a fuse not shown in the tables may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

227 In the event of a breakdown

Fuse tables Fusebox 1

Fuse N° Rating Functions

F1 40 A Heated rear screen.

F2 20 A Electric door mirrors.

F5 30 A Panoramic glass sunroof blind.

F6 20 A 12 V, rear multimedia sockets.

F7 20 A 230 V socket.

F9 25 A Heated seats.

F10 20 A Trailer interface unit.

F11 20 A Air conditioning blower.

F12 30 A Electric window motor.

228 In the event of a breakdown

Fuse N° Rating Functions

F7 10 A 12 V boot socket, rear multimedia.

F8 20 A Rear windscreen wiper.

F10 30 A Locks.

F17 5 A Instrument panel.

F18 5 A Automatic gearbox selector.

F21 3 A START/STOP button. Fusebox 2 F22 3 A Rain and sunshine sensor, windscreen camera.

F24 5 A Parking aid, panoramic visual aid.

F27 5 A Automatic gearbox.

F29 20 A Audio and telematics systems.

F32 15 A 12 V sockets.

F35 5 A Headlamp beam height adjustment, heated rear screen, radar.

F36 5 A Lighting: glove box, central storage, reading lamps, courtesy lamps. 8

229 In the event of a breakdown Fuses in the engine Table of fuses compartment Fuse no. Rating Functions The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery. F16 20 A Headlamp wash.

F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp. Access to the fuses F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.

F29 40 A Wipers.

F Unclip the cover by pushing the 2 red latches towards the back of the vehicle. F Change the fuse. F When you have finished, close the cover very carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

230 In the event of a breakdown 12 V battery Access to the battery Starting using another battery General points When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the Lead-acid starter batteries engine can be started using a backup battery (external or from another vehicle) and jump Batteries contain harmful substances leads or a battery booster. such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must Never try to start the engine by connecting not, in any circumstances, be discarded a battery charger. with household waste. Never use a 24 V or higher battery Take used remote control batteries and booster. vehicle batteries to a special collection The battery is located under the bonnet. Check beforehand that the backup point. For access to the (+) terminal: battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and F release the bonnet using the interior lever, a capacity at least equal to that of the Protect your eyes and face before then the exterior safety catch, discharged battery. handling the battery. F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay, The two vehicles must not be in contact All operations on the battery must be F lift the plastic cover for access to the (+) with each other. carried out in a well ventilated area and terminal. Switch off the electrical consumers on away from naked flames and sources of both vehicles (audio system, wipers, The battery (-) terminal is not accessible. sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion lighting, etc.). A remote earth point is located on the upper or fire. Ensure that the jump lead cables do not part of the bonnet (next to the battery). Wash your hands afterwards. pass close to moving parts of the engine (cooling fan, belts, etc.). Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the engine is running. 8

231 In the event of a breakdown

F Start the engine of the vehicle with the In some circumstances it may be necessary to good battery and leave it running for a few charge the battery: minutes. - if you only use your vehicle for short F Operate the starter on the broken down journeys, vehicle and let the engine run. - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for If the engine does not start straight away, several weeks. switch off the ignition and wait a few moments Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified before trying again. workshop.

F Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the If you wish to charge your vehicle's battery reverse order. yourself, use only a charger compatible F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if with lead-acid batteries with a nominal your vehicle has one. voltage of 12 V. F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. Follow the instructions provided by the F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if manufacturer of the charger. your vehicle has one. Some functions, including Stop & Start, Never reverse polarities. F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of are not available if the battery is not flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to sufficiently charged. the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the It is not necessary to disconnect the booster. battery. F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery B or the booster (or an earth point on the Charging the battery using other vehicle). a battery charger F Connect the other end of the green or black For optimum service life of the battery, it is cable to earth point C on the broken down essential to maintain an adequate state of vehicle. charge.

232 In the event of a breakdown

F At the end of the charging operation, switch Before disconnecting the battery: off charger B before disconnecting the F close all openings (doors, boot, windows, cables from battery A. roof), F switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, wipers, lighting, etc.). F switch off the ignition and wait for four minutes. At the battery, detach the (+) terminal only.

If this label is present, it is essential to use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related to the Stop & Start Quick-release terminal clamp system. Disconnecting the (+) terminal

Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk F Switch off the ignition. of explosion! F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio If the battery has frozen, have it checked system, lighting, wipers, etc.). by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified F Switch off charger B before connecting the workshop who will check that the internal cables to the battery, so as to avoid any components have not been damaged and dangerous sparks. that the container has not cracked, which F Ensure that the charger cables are in good would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive condition. acid leaking. F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B. one, on the (+) terminal. F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. F Connect charger B cables as follows: Disconnecting the battery 8 - the (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of In order to maintain an adequate state battery A, of charge for starting the engine, it is - the (-) black cable to earth point C on the recommended that the battery be disconnected vehicle. if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. 233 In the event of a breakdown

Reconnecting the (+) terminal Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on Towing version): Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for - the remote control key, towing another vehicle using the towing eye. - the electric blind(s), - etc. Access to tooling Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. F Raise the lever A fully. F Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. F Push the clamp B fully down. F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B. The Stop & Start system may not be operational during the trip following the first engine start. Do not force the lever as locking will not In this case, the system will only be The towing eye is installed in the boot under be possible if the clamp is not positioned available again after a continuous the floor. correctly; start the procedure again. period of immobilisation of the vehicle, The tool for opening the front protective cover a period which depends on the exterior is fixed to the towing eye. temperature and the state of charge of the To access it: Following reconnection of the battery (up to about 8 hours). F open the boot, battery F lift the floor and remove it, F Following reconnection of the battery, switch on remove the towing eye from the holder. the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. If minor problems nevertheless persist following this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

234 In the event of a breakdown

F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on General recommendations Towing your vehicle both vehicles. Observe the legislation in force in your F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short country. distance. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is greater than that of the towed vehicle. Towing another vehicle The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towbar: rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by assistance. using the tool fixed on the ring. In the following cases, you must always F Screw the towing eye in fully. call on a professional recovery service: F Install the towbar. - vehicle broken down on a motorway or F Move the gear lever into neutral (position N F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by fast road, for an automatic gearbox). pressing at the bottom. - four-wheel drive vehicle, F Screw the towing eye in fully. - when it is not possible to put the F Install the towbar. gearbox into neutral, unlock the F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. steering, or release the parking brake, Failure to follow this instruction may cause F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short - towing with only two wheels on the damage to some components (braking, distance. ground, driveline, etc.) and the absence of braking - where there is no approved towbar, assistance when the engine is restarted. etc. available. 8

F Unlock the steering by turning the ignition key one notch and release the parking brake.

235 In the event of a breakdown BlueHDi 130 S&S and F Put the cover back in place and clip it in. Running out of fuel F Close the bonnet. (Diesel) BlueHDi 160 S&S engines F On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of system must be primed if you run out of fuel. Diesel. F For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the Switch on the ignition (without starting the corresponding engine compartment view. engine). F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the ignition. F Operate the starter to run the engine. If the engine does not start, repeat the For more information on Diesel misfuel procedure. prevention, refer to the corresponding section. Other engines If the engine does not start first time, do not keep trying but start the procedure F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of again from the beginning. Diesel. F Open the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the BlueHDi 100 S&S, BlueHDi priming pump. 115/120 S&S and BlueHDi F Operate the priming pump 135/150 S&S engines repeatedly until resistance is felt F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of (there may be resistance on the Diesel. first press). F Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine). F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the engine does not start at the first attempt, ignition. wait around 15 seconds before trying F Repeat the operation 10 times. again). F Operate the starter to run the engine. F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. 236 Technical data

The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load Engine technical data and values indicated are valid up to a maximum towed loads altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value must be reduced by 10% for each additional Engines 1,000 metres of altitude. The maximum authorised nose weight The engine characteristics are given in the corresponds to the weight permitted on the vehicle's registration document, as well as in towball. sales brochures.

When exterior temperatures are high, The maximum power corresponds to the the vehicle performance may be limited value type-approved on a test bed, under in order to protect the engine. When the conditions defined in European legislation exterior temperature is higher than 37°C, (Directive 1999/99/EC). limit the towed weight.

For more information, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can adversely affect roadholding. Braking distances are increased when Weights and towed loads towing a trailer. When using a vehicle to tow, never The weights and towed loads relating to your exceed a speed of approximately 60 mph vehicle are given in the registration document, (100 km/h) (observe the local legislation as well as in sales brochures. in force). These values are also given on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a CITROËN If the exterior temperature is high, it is dealer or a qualified workshop. recommended that the engine is allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling. 9

237 Technical data Engines and towed loads – PETROL

PureTech PureTech PureTech PureTech PureTech Petrol engines 110 S&S** 130 S&S** 130 S&S*** 130 S&S** 130 S&S***

BVM6 (manual BVM6 (manual BVM6 (manual EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic Gearbox 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)

Code EB2DTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS EB2DTS EB2ADTS

3D 3D…3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A … 3D… 3E… 3A …

Model codes HNX… HNY… HNY… HNS…P HNS…R M/1S – M/2SM M/1S – M/2SM T/1S – T/2S

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 96 96

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) 1,270-1,050- 1,270-1,050- 1,130 - - on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,050 1,050

Unbraked trailer 640 640-647-648 - 640-647-648 -

Recommended nose weight 70 70 - 70 -

** Euro 6.1 engine 3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer *** Euro 6.2 engine (5 seats). 3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (7 seats).

238 Technical data

THP 165 S&S** Petrol engines THP 150/160** THP 165 S&S** PureTech 180 S&S*** (For Israel)

EAT6 (automatic EAT6 (automatic EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic Gearbox 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)

Code EP6FDTM EP6FDT EP6FDTM EP6FADTXD

3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3D…3E… 3A … 3E… 3A …

5GX – 5GY… Model codes 5GY… A-A/1-A/2-A/D- A/1D- 5GZT/S 5GF…R A/S – A/1S – A/2S A/2D-Y-Y/1-Y/2

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110/121 121 121 132

Fuel Unleaded/Alcohol Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

1,400 1,400 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) 800 - - - on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,250-1,200 1,250-1,200 685 685 Unbraked trailer 600 - - - 690-690 690-690

Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 -

** Euro 6.1 engine 3D…: CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3E…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer *** Euro 6.2 engine (5 seats). 3A…: CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (7 seats). 9

239 Technical data Engines and towed loads – DIESEL

Diesel engines HDi 115* HDi 115* BlueHDi 100 S&S**

Gearbox BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)

Code DV6C DV6C DV6FD

3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes BHY… 9HC8 9HC8/1 6/1S – 6/2SM

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,560 1,560

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85 85 73

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) 1,400-1,240-1,200 800 1,200-1,000-1,000 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer 680-690-690 685-695-695 645-659-660

Recommended nose weight 70 70 70

* Euro 5 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop & ** Euro 6.1 engine Start. 3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (7 seats).

240 Technical data

Diesel engines BlueHDi 115/120 S&S** BlueHDi 130 S&S*** BlueHDi 130 S&S***

Gearbox EAT6 (automatic 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed) BVM6 (manual 6-speed)

Code DV6FCD DV5RC DV5RC

3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes BHZ – BHX… YHZ… YHZ… T/1S – T/2S P/S – P/1S – P/2S P/S – P/1S – P/2S

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,560 1,499 1,499

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 85/88 96 96

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) 1,400-1,200-1,200 - - on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer 660-675-675 - -

Recommended nose weight 70 - -

** Euro 6.1 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop & *** Euro 6.2 engine Start. 3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (7 seats). 9

241 Technical data

BlueHDi BlueHDi Diesel engines BlueHDi 130 S&S*** BlueHDi 160 S&S*** 135/150 S&S** 135/150 S&S**

EAT8 (automatic BVM6 (manual EAT6 (automatic EAT8 (automatic Gearbox 8-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed)

Code DV5RC DW10FD DW10FD DW10FCC

3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A… 3D…3E… 3A…

Model codes AHX-AHR-AHV-AHS… AHX… EHY… YHZ…R M/S – M/1S T/S – T/1S R/S – R/1S

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,499 1,997 1,997 1,997

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 110 110 120

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) - 1,500-1,450-1,400 1,500-1,380-1,300 1,500-1,300-1,300 on a 10% or 12% gradient

Unbraked trailer - 745-750-750 750 750

Recommended nose weight - 70 70 70

** Euro 6.1 engine …/S: e-HDi model equipped with Stop & Start. *** Euro 6.2 engine 3D… : CITROËN C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3E… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (5 seats). 3A… : CITROËN Grand C4 SpaceTourer (7 seats).

242 Technical data Dimensions (in mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

* Mirrors folded in. 9

243 Technical data

- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number, Checking tyre pressures Identification markings - the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), The tyre pressures should be checked when Different visible markings for the identification - the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle cold at least monthly. and research of your vehicle. weight), The pressures given on the label are valid for - the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross cold tyres. If you have driven for more than train weight), 10 minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres) - the maximum weight on the front axle, at more than 31 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be - the maximum weight on the rear axle. warm; in this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be added to the pressures given on the label.

Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre.

D. Tyre/paint label. This label on the middle door pillar, driver's Low tyre pressures increase fuel side, contains the following information: consumption. - the tyre inflation pressures with and without load, - the tyre sizes (including the load index and A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), speed rating), under the bonnet. - the spare tyre inflation pressure, This number is engraved on the chassis near - the paint colour code. the right-hand front wheel arch. B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the windscreen lower cross member. The number is on a label, visible through the windscreen. The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed C. Manufacturer's label. This tamperproof label on the middle door indices than those indicated on the label, pillar, right or left-hand side, contains the without affecting inflation pressure. following information: - the name of the manufacturer, 244 CITROËN Connect Radio

CITROËN Connect Radio The different functions and settings described vary depending on the version and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. The display of the Energy Economy Mode message signals that a change to standby is imminent. Multimedia audio system – Contents ® First steps 2 Applications – Bluetooth Steering mounted controls 3 telephone Menus 4 The link below gives access to OSS (Open Applications 5 Source Software) codes for the system. Radio 6 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 8 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ Media 9 Telephone 11 Settings 16 Frequently asked questions 18 . 1 CITROËN Connect Radio

Selecting the audio source (depending on version): The touch screen is of the "capacitive" First steps - FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations. type. With the engine running, a press - Telephone connected via Bluetooth* and To clean the screen, use a soft, non- mutes the sound. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming). abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with With the ignition off, a press turns - CD player (depending on model). no additional product. the system on. - USB memory stick. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. - Media player connected via the auxiliary socket Do not touch the screen with wet hands. Adjustment of the volume. (depending on model).

* Depending on equipment. Use the buttons on either side of or below the touch screen for access to the menus, then Certain information is displayed permanently in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. the upper band of the touch screen: Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Reminder of the air conditioning information "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen (depending on version), and direct access to for access to the menus, then press the virtual the corresponding menu. buttons in the touch screen. - Reminder of the Radio Media and Telephone menu information. You can display the menus at any time by - Access to the Settings of the touch screen In the "Settings" menu you can create pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. and digital instrument panel. a profile for just one person or a group All of the touch areas of the screen are white. of people with common points, with the Press in the grey zone to go back a level or possibility of entering a multitude of confirm. settings (radio presets, audio settings, Press the back arrow to go back a level or ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken confirm. into account automatically.

2 CITROËN Connect Radio

Radio: In very hot conditions, the volume may Steering mounted controls Short press: display the list of radio be limited to protect the system. It may go stations. – Type 2 into standby (screen and sound off) for at Long press: update the list. least 5 minutes Media: The return to normal takes place when Short press: display the list of the temperature in the passenger folders. compartment has dropped. Depending on model. Long press: display the available sorting options. Voice commands: This control is located on the Change audio source (radio; USB; steering wheel or at the end of the Steering mounted controls AUX if equipment connected; CD; lighting control stalk (depending on streaming). model). Steering mounted controls – Short press, smartphone voice Type 1 Confirm a selection. commands via the system.

Increase volume.

or Increase volume. Radio: Select the previous/next preset radio station. Select the previous/next item in Mute/Restore the sound. Decrease volume. a menu or a list. Or Media: Mute by pressing the volume or Select the previous/next track. increase and decrease buttons Select the previous/next item in simultaneously. a menu or a list. Mute/Restore sound by Restore the sound by pressing one simultaneously pressing the of the two volume buttons. increase and decrease volume buttons. . 3 CITROËN Connect Radio Decrease volume. Menus Radio Media or Depending on model/Depending on version Select an audio source or radio station. Air conditioning Manage various temperature and air Media (short press): change the flow settings. multimedia source. or Telephone (short press): start telephone call. Call in progress (short press): access telephone menu. Telephone (long press): reject an 18,5 21,5 incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. Telephone Radio (rotate): previous/next preset. Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Media (rotate): previous/next track, Operate certain applications on or move in a list. Applications a smartphone connected via Short press: confirm a selection; if MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Access configurable equipment. nothing selected, access to presets. Auto.

Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received.

4 CITROËN Connect Radio Driving Applications Activate, deactivate or configure Viewing photos certain vehicle functions. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The system can read folders and image files in the formats:.tiff;.gif;.jpg/jpeg;.bmp;.png. Settings

Configure a personal profile and/ Press Applications to display the or configure the sound (balance, primary page. ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, etc.). Navigation Press "Photos". Configure the guidance and select your destination via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Auto. Select a folder.

Select an image to view.

Press this button to display the details of the photo.

Press the back arrow to go back a level. . 5 CITROËN Connect Radio Managing messages Press one of the buttons for an Changing waveband automatic search for radio stations. Press Applications to display the Press Radio Media to display the primary page. primary page. Or Press "SMS". Move the cursor for a manual search Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the for frequencies up or down. secondary page. Press "Band" to change waveband. Select the "SMS" tab. Or Press the frequency. Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press this button to select the display settings for messages. Enter the FM and AM waveband values using the virtual keypad. Press this button to search for a contact. Presetting a station Press "OK" to confirm. Select a radio station or frequency.

Select the "Quick messages" tab. Make a short press on the star Radio reception may be affected by the outline. If the star is filled in, the use of electrical equipment not approved radio station is already preset. Press this button to select the by the Brand, such as a USB charger Or display settings for messages. connected to the 12 V socket. The external environment (hills, buildings, Select a radio station or frequency. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press "Preset". block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio This is a normal effect of the way in Make a long press on one of the which radio waves are transmitted and buttons to preset the station. Selecting a station does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. 6 CITROËN Connect Radio Activating/Deactivating RDS Press Radio Media to display the Activate/Deactivate "TA". primary page. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press in the grey zone to confirm. secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Activate/Deactivate "News"/"Info".

Activate/Deactivate " ". RDS Press in the grey zone to confirm. Audio settings Press Radio Media to display the Press in the grey area to confirm. primary page.

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Play TA messages secondary page.

The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Press "Audio settings". listening to the same station by automatically gives priority to TA alert messages. retuning to alternative frequencies. However, To operate, this function needs good in certain conditions, coverage of this RDS reception of a radio station that carries station may not be assured throughout the this type of message. While traffic Select the "Tone" or "Balance" entire country as radio stations do not cover information is being broadcast, the current or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of media is automatically interrupted so that configure the audio settings. reception of the station during a journey. the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message. Press the back arrow to confirm. Display text information

The "Radio Text" function allows Press Radio Media to display the information transmitted by the radio primary page. station and related to the station or the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the song playing to be displayed. secondary page. . 7 CITROËN Connect Radio

In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio DAB (Digital Audio FM-DAB Tracking settings, as well as Bass, Medium and Broadcasting) radio Treble are different and independent for "DAB" does not cover 100% of the each audio source. Terrestrial Digital Radio territory. In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers, When the digital radio signal is poor, and settings are the "FM-DAB Tracking" allows you to Driver Front only Digital radio provides higher quality common to all sources. continue listening to the same station, reception. In the " " tab, activate or deactivate by automatically switching to the Sound The different "multiplex/ensemble" " ", " corresponding FM analogue station (if Volume linked to speed Auxiliary services offer a choice of radio stations " and " ". there is one). input Touch tones arranged in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the primary page. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation primary page. with the Arkamys© system) is audio Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the processing that allows the quality of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. sound to be adapted according to the secondary page. number of passengers in the vehicle. Activate/Deactivate "FM-DAB Press "Waveband" to select the Tracking". "DAB band". Press in the grey zone to confirm. Onboard audio: the Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises the balance/distribution Press in the grey zone to confirm. of sound in the passenger compartment.

If "FM-DAB Tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to FM analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. When the digital signal quality becomes good, the system automatically switches back to "DAB".

8 CITROËN Connect Radio

The playlists are updated every time the If the "DAB" station being listened to is Selecting the source ignition is switched off or a USB stick is not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB connected. The lists are memorised: if they are Press Radio Media to display the Tracking" is not activated, the sound will not modified, the subsequent loading time will primary page. cut out while the digital signal is too weak. be shorter. Press the "SOURCES" button. Media Auxiliary socket (AUX) Choose the source. (depending on model/depending on equipment) USB port Bluetooth® audio streaming Streaming allows you to listen to music from your smartphone.

The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your system. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" If play does not start automatically, it may be Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings. necessary to start the audio playback from the connect the USB device to the USB port using smartphone. a suitable cable (not supplied). Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) Control is from the portable device or by using to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not the system's touch buttons. To protect the system, do not use a USB supplied). hub. First adjust the volume on your portable device Once connected in Streaming mode, the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your smartphone is considered to be a media The system builds playlists (in temporary audio system. source. memory), an operation which can take from Display and management of the controls are a few seconds to several minutes at the first via the portable device. connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. . 9 CITROËN Connect Radio Connecting Apple® players Information and advice It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using special characters Connect the Apple® player to the USB port (e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or The system supports USB Mass Storage using a suitable cable (not supplied). display problems. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® Play starts automatically. players via USB ports. The adapter cable Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format Control is via the audio system. is not supplied. (File Allocation Table). Device management is done by the audio system controls. It is recommended that the original USB Other devices, not recognised on The classifications available are those cable for the portable device be used. connection, must be connected to the of the portable device connected auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not (artists/albums/genres/playlists/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, In order to be able to play a burned CDR or audiobooks/podcasts); you can also use depending on compatibility. CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or a classification structured in the form of Joliet if possible when burning the CD. a library. If the disc is burned in another format, it may The default classification used is by artist. not be played correctly. To modify the classification used, return It is recommended that the same burning to the first level of the menu then select standard be always used on an individual disc, the desired classification (playlists for To protect the system, do not use a USB with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) example) and confirm to go down through hub. for the best acoustic quality. the menu to the desired track. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the The audio equipment will only play audio files Joliet standard is recommended. with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between The version of software in the audio system 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. may not be compatible with the generation of It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. your Apple® player. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 standard. Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 kHz.

10 CITROËN Connect Radio

When connecting a smartphone As a safety measure, applications can Telephone to the system, it is recommended only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; TM that Bluetooth® be started on the MirrorLink smartphone display is interrupted once the vehicle is smartphone. connection moving.

As a safety measure and because it TM Telephone connected by requires sustained attention by the driver, The "MirrorLink " function requires Bluetooth® using a smartphone when driving is a compatible smartphone and prohibited. applications. From the system, press All operations must be done with the "Telephone" to display the primary vehicle stationary. page. Telephone not connected by Bluetooth® Press the "PHONE" button to display the The synchronisation of a personal secondary page. smartphone allows users to display Connect a USB cable. The Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the applications adapted for the smartphone's smartphone charges when application in the system. MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle connected by a USB cable. screen. From the system, press The processes and standards "Telephone" to display the primary Once the connection is established, a page are constantly changing. For the page. is displayed with the applications already communication process between the downloaded to your smartphone and adapted smartphone and the system to operate, Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the to MirrorLinkTM technology. it is essential that the smartphone be application in the system. Access to the different audio sources remains unlocked; update the operating system accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM of the smartphone as well as the date display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. and time of the smartphone and the Depending on the smartphone, it may be TM Access to the menus for the system is possible system. necessary to activate the "MirrorLink" For the list of eligible smartphones, go function. at any time using the dedicated buttons. to the Brand's internet website in your During the procedure, several country. screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. There may be a wait for the availability of Accept to start and complete the applications, depending on the quality of connection. your network. . 11 CITROËN Connect Radio CarPlay® smartphone Or Android Auto smartphone connection If the smartphone is already connection connected by Bluetooth®. As a safety measure and because it As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. smartphone charges when prohibited. All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary. vehicle stationary. From the system, press "Telephone" to display the primary The synchronisation of a personal page. On your smartphone, download the smartphone allows users to display Android Auto application. Press the "PHONE" button to go to the applications compatible with the secondary page. smartphone's CarPlay® technology on the vehicle screen when the smartphone's Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® function has been previously The synchronisation of a personal CarPlay® interface. activated. smartphone allows users to display As the processes and standards are applications adapted for the smartphone's Android Auto technology on the vehicle constantly changing, it is recommended screen. that you keep your smartphone's On connecting the USB cable, the The processes and standards operating system updated. CarPlay® function deactivates the For the list of eligible smartphones, go are constantly changing. For the system's Bluetooth® mode. to the Brand's internet website in your communication process between the country. smartphone and the system to operate, it is essential that the smartphone be ® You can go to the CarPlay unlocked; update the operating system Connect a USB cable. The navigation at any time by pressing of the smartphone as well as the date smartphone charges when the system's Navigation button. and time of the smartphone and the connected by a USB cable. system. For the list of eligible smartphones, go From the system, press Telephone to the Brand's internet website in your ® to display the CarPlay interface. country.

12 CITROËN Connect Radio

When connecting a smartphone ® As a safety measure, applications can Pairing a Bluetooth to the system, it is recommended only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; that Bluetooth® is started on the telephone display is interrupted once the vehicle is smartphone moving. As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile The "Android Auto" function requires the Telephone connected by Bluetooth® telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free use of a compatible smartphone and system of your audio system must be applications. From the system, press done with the vehicle stationary and the "Telephone" to display the primary ignition on. page. Telephone not connected by ® Bluetooth Press the "PHONE" button to display the secondary page. Connect a USB cable. The Activate the Bluetooth function on the smartphone charges when telephone and ensure that it is "visible to Press "Android Auto" to start the connected by a USB cable. all" (telephone configuration). application in the system.

From the system, press "Telephone" to display the primary Procedure from the telephone Different audio sources remain accessible in page. the margin of the Android Auto display, using Select the name of the system in the touch buttons in the upper bar. list of devices detected. Press "Android Auto" to start the Access to the menus for the system is possible application in the system. at any time using the dedicated buttons. In the system, accept the connection request Depending on the smartphone, it may be from the telephone. necessary to activate the "Android Auto" function. There may be a wait for the availability of To complete the pairing, whichever During the procedure, several applications, depending on the quality of procedure is used (from the telephone or screen pages relating to certain your network. from the system), ensure that the code functions are displayed. is the same in the system and in the Accept to start and complete the telephone. connection. . 13 CITROËN Connect Radio

Procedure from the system Automatic reconnection The ability of the system to connect to just Press Telephone to display the To modify the connection profile: one profile depends on the telephone. primary page. All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the primary page. Press "Bluetooth search". The list of telephones detected is Press the "PHONE" button to go to the The services available depend on displayed. secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press "Bluetooth connection" to used. Check the instructions for your Select the name of the chosen display the list of paired devices. telephone and with your service provider telephone in the list. for the services to which you have access.

Press the "details" button of a paired device. If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended The profiles compatible with the system that you deactivate and then reactivate the are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, "Bluetooth" function in your telephone. MAP and PAN. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: Go to the Brand's website for more information Depending on the type of telephone, you - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). may be asked to accept or not the transfer only), of your contacts and messages. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of the audio files on the telephone), - " ". Internet data Managing paired telephones On return to the vehicle, if the last Select one or more profiles. telephone connected is present again, it is This function allows the connection or automatically recognised and within about disconnection of a peripheral device as 30 seconds of switching on the ignition, well as the deletion of a pairing. the connection is established without any Press "OK" to confirm. action on your part (Bluetooth activated). Press Telephone to display the primary page.

14 CITROËN Connect Radio Press the "PHONE" button to go to the And Calling a contact secondary page. Make a long press Press Telephone to display the Press "Bluetooth connection" to primary page. display the list of paired devices. on the steering mounted PHONE Or make a long press button to reject the call. Press on the name of the telephone chosen in the list to disconnect it. Or Press again to connect it. Press "End call". on the steering mounted PHONE button.

Press "Contacts".

Deleting a telephone Making a call Select the desired contact from the list offered. Press the basket at the top right Using the telephone is not recommended Press "Call". of the screen to display a basket while driving. alongside the telephone chosen. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls. Press the basket alongside the Calling a recently used telephone chosen to delete it. number Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the primary page. Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the primary page. Or An incoming call is announced by a ring and Make a long press a superimposed display in the screen. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Make a short press on the steering mounted PHONE button to accept Press "Call" to start the call. on the steering mounted button. an incoming call. . 15 CITROËN Connect Radio

Press "Recent calls". Press the back arrow again to Settings confirm. Select the desired contact from the list offered. Profile settings Press this button to initialise the It is always possible to make a call directly As a safety measure and because it profile selected. from the telephone; as a safety measure, requires the sustained attention of the first park the vehicle. driver, changes to settings must only be done with the vehicle stationary. Adjust brightness Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the primary page. Setting the ringtone primary page. Press Telephone to display the primary page. Press Brightness. Press "Profiles".

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Move the cursor to adjust the Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" brightness of the screen and/or of Press "Ring volume" to display the or "Common profile". the instrument panel (depending on volume bar. version). Press this button to enter a name for Press in the grey zone to confirm. the profile using the virtual keypad. Press the arrows or move the cursor to set the ring volume. Press "OK" to save.

Press the back arrow to confirm. Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the primary page. Press this button to activate the profile.

16 CITROËN Connect Radio

Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Screen configuration". Press the back arrow to confirm. secondary page.

Press "System configuration". Press "Brightness". Setting the time Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of Press Settings to display the Select "Units" to change the units of distance, the instrument panel (depending on primary page. fuel consumption and temperature. version). Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial Press "Animation". Press "Configuration" to go to the settings. secondary page. Activate or deactivate: "Automatic scrolling". Returning the system to factory settings Press " ". activates the English language by default Select "Animated transitions". Date and time (depending on version).

Press the back arrow to confirm. Select "System info" to display the versions of Select "Time". the different modules installed in the system. Press this button to adjust the time using the virtual keypad. Press the back arrow to confirm. Select the language

Press Settings to display the Press "OK" to save the time. primary page. Press Settings to display the primary page. Press "Configuration" to go to the Press this button to define the time secondary page. zone. Press "Configuration" to go to the secondary page. Select "Language" to change the Select the display format for the time language. (12h/24h). . 17 CITROËN Connect Radio

Activate or deactivate Press the back arrow to save the synchronisation with GPS (UTC). date.

Press the back arrow to save the Select the display format of the date. settings.

Press the back arrow again to confirm. The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and summer time (depending on the country of sale). Adjustment of the time and date is only available if "GPS Synchronisation" is deactivated. Setting the date The change between winter and summer Press Settings to display the time is done by changing the time zone. primary page.

Press "Configuration" to go to the secondary page. Frequently asked questions Press "Date and time". The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

Select "Date". Press on this button to define the date.

18 CITROËN Connect Radio

Radio

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are not the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment. including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer. example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the received stations. name in the list. "Radio" page. The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name.

. 19 CITROËN Connect Radio Media

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick. catalogue time).

Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.

Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device. launch playback.

Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.

20 CITROËN Connect Radio Telephone

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth switched off or the telephone may not be switched on. visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).

The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).

The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings. order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.

. 21 CITROËN Connect Radio Settings

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical When changing the ambience setting, the ambience. treble and bass settings are reset.

When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. When changing the distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio sound sources, which can generate audible functions to the middle position. differences when changing source.

When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start the engine to increase the charge of the after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of battery. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.

22 CITROËN Connect Nav

CITROËN Connect Nav The different functions and settings described vary depending on the version and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. The display of the Energy Economy Contents Mode message signals that a change to GPS satellite navigation – standby is imminent. Applications – Multimedia First steps 2 ® Steering mounted controls 3 audio system – Bluetooth Menus 3 telephone Voice commands 5 The link below gives access to OSS (Open Navigation 11 Source Software) codes for the system. Connected navigation 13 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ Applications 16 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ Radio 21 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22 Media 23 Telephone 25 Settings 29 Frequently asked questions 32 . 1 CITROËN Connect Nav

First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive" 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 type. With the engine running, a press To clean the screen, use a soft, non- mutes the sound. abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with With the ignition off, a press turns no additional product. the system on. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Adjustment of the volume. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Certain information is displayed permanently in Use the buttons either side of or below the Selecting the audio source (depending on the upper band of the touch screen: touch screen for access to the menus, then version): - Reminder of the air conditioning information press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. - FM/DAB*/AM* radios. (depending on version), and direct access to - USB memory stick. the corresponding menu. - CD Player (depending on model). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Go directly to the selection of the audio - Media player connected via the auxiliary "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen source, to the list of radio stations (or list of socket (depending on model). for access to the menus, then press the virtual titles depending on the source). - Telephone connected via Bluetooth and buttons in the touch screen. - Go to the message notifications, emails, Bluetooth multimedia broadcast* (streaming). map updates and, depending on the services, the navigation notifications. You can display the menus at any time by - Go to the settings for the touch screen and pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. the digital instrument panel.

All of the touch areas of the screen are white. Press the cross to go back a level. Press "OK" to confirm.

* Depending on equipment. 2 CITROËN Connect Nav

Increase volume. Radio (rotate): automatic search for In the "Settings" menu you can create the previous/next station. a profile for just one person or a group or Media (rotate): previous/next track, of people with common points, with the or move in a list. possibility of entering a multitude of Short press: confirm a selection; if settings (radio presets, audio settings, nothing selected, access to presets. navigation history, contact favourites, Mute/Restore the sound. etc.); these settings are taken into account Or automatically. Mute by pressing the volume or increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. Radio: display the list of stations. Restore the sound by pressing one Media: display the list of tracks. In very hot conditions, the volume may of the two volume buttons. Radio (press and hold): update the be limited to protect the system. It may go list of stations received. into standby (screen and sound off) for at least 5 minutes The return to normal takes place when Decrease volume. the temperature in the passenger Menus or compartment has dropped. Depending on model/Depending on version

Air conditioning Manage various temperature and air Media (short press): change the flow settings. Steering mounted controls multimedia source. Depending on model Telephone (short press): start or telephone call. Voice commands: 23 °C 12:13 Call in progress (short press): This control is located on the access telephone menu. steering wheel or at the end of the Telephone (long press): reject an lighting control stalk (depending on incoming call, end call; when no call model). is in progress, access telephone 18,5 21,5 Short press, system voice menu. commands. Long press, smartphone voice commands via the system. . 3 CITROËN Connect Nav

Connected navigation 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Telephone Enter navigation settings and Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, choose a destination. read messages and emails and send or Use services available in real time, or quick messages. depending on equipment.

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

Radio Media Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs. or

Applications 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Settings Operate certain applications on Configure a personal profile and/ FM/87.5 MHz a smartphone connected via or configure the sound (balance, ® TM 87.5MHz or CarPlay , MirrorLink or Android ambience, etc.) and the display or Auto. (language, units, date, time, etc.). Check the state of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi connections.

4 CITROËN Connect Nav

23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Voice commands First steps Steering mounted controls Example of a "voice command" for navigation: Pressing this button activates the "Navigate to address, 11 Regent voice commands function. Street, London". Example of a "voice command" for the radio and media: "Play artist, Madonna". To ensure that voice commands are Example of a "voice command" for always recognised by the system, please the telephone: observe the following recommendations: "Call David Miller". Vehicle - speak in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your Activate, deactivate or configure voice. The voice commands, with a choice of certain vehicle functions. - always wait for the "beep" (audible 12 languages (English, French, Italian, or signal) before speaking. Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, - for best operation, it is recommended Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic, that the windows and sunroof Brazilian), are made using the language be closed to avoid extraneous previously chosen and set in the system. 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 interference (depending on version). For some voice commands, there are - before making a voice command, ask alternative synonyms. other passengers not to speak. Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/… The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate to address" and "Display POI in the city" are not available.

. 5 CITROËN Connect Nav Information – Using the system Global voice commands

Press the Push To Talk voice command button and tell me These commands can be made from any what you'd like after the tone. screen page after pressing the "Voice Remember you can interrupt command" or "Telephone" button located me at any time by pressing on the steering wheel, as long as there is this button. If you press it no telephone call in progress. again while I'm waiting for you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to undo something, say Voice commands Help messages "undo". And to get information and tips at any time, just say "help". If you ask me to do Help There are lots of topics I can help you with. something and there's some You can say: "help with phone", "help with information missing that I need, Voice command help navigation", "help with media" or "help with I'll give you some examples radio". For an overview on how to use voice or take you through it step by Navigation help controls, you can say "help with voice controls". step. There's more information available in "beginner" mode. Radio help You can set the dialogue mode Media help to "expert" when you feel comfortable. Telephone help

Set dialogue mode as <…> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.

Select profile <…> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.

Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again. No

6 CITROËN Connect Nav "Navigation" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say command" or "Telephone" button located "navigate to" and then the address or contact on the steering wheel, as long as there is Navigate to work name. For example, "navigate to address no telephone call in progress. 11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to Navigate to preferred address <…> contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's Navigate to contact <…> a preferred or recent destination. For example, "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", Navigate to address <…> "navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate Show nearby POI <…> home". To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or "show nearby petrol station". For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance".

Remaining distance To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", Remaining time "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands. Arrival time

Stop route guidance

Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system. . 7 CITROËN Connect Nav "Radio Media" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice Tune to channel <…> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune command" or "Telephone" button located to" and the station name or frequency. For on the steering wheel, as long as there is example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to no telephone call in progress. 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset number five".

What's playing To display the details of the current "track", "artist" and "album", you can say "What's playing".

Play song <…> Use the command "play" or "listen to" to select the type of music you'd like to hear. You can Play artist <…> pick by "song", "artist", or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play Play album <…> song, Hey Jude", or "play album, Thriller".

Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.

8 CITROËN Connect Nav "Telephone" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued Call contact <…>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by from any main screen page after pressing the contact name, for example: "Call David the "Telephone" button on the steering Dial <…>* Miller". You can also include the phone type, for wheel, as long as there is no telephone example: "Call David Miller at home". To make Display contacts* call in progress. a call by number, say "dial" followed by the If there is no telephone connected by Display calls* phone number, for example, "Dial 07776 835 Bluetooth, a voice message announces: 417". You can check your voicemail by saying "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call (message box| voicemail)* "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick voice session will be closed. message to", followed by the contact, and then the name of the quick message you'd like to send. For example, "send quick message to David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of calls, say "display calls". For more information on SMS, you can say "help with texting".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done. . 9 CITROËN Connect Nav "Text message" voice commands Voice commands Help messages

If a telephone is connected to the system, these voice commands can be issued Send text to <…> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to from any main screen page after pressing most recent message". When you want to send the "Telephone" button on the steering Listen to most recent message* a text, there's a set of quick messages ready wheel, as long as there is no telephone for you to use. Just use the quick message call in progress. name and say something like "send quick If there is no telephone connected by message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the Bluetooth, a voice message announces: phone menu for the names of the supported "Please first connect a telephone", and the messages. voice session will be closed. Please say "call" or "send quick message to", and then select a line from the list. To move around a list shown on the display, you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or "previous page". To undo your selection, say "undo". To cancel the current action and start again, say "cancel".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.

The system only sends pre-recorded "Quick messages".

10 CITROËN Connect Nav

Press "OK" to start navigation. Navigation Zoom out/zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen. Choice of a destination Select "Position" to visualise the arrival To a new destination In order to be able to use the navigation, point geographically. Press Navigation to display the it is necessary to fill in the "City", the primary page. "Street" and the "Number" on the or virtual keyboard or take it from the list in To "My home" or "My work" "Contact" or in the "History" of addresses.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the Press Navigation to display the primary page. secondary page. Without confirmation of the street number, you will be guided to one end of the street. or Select "Enter address".

To a recent destination Press the "MENU" button to go to the Select the "Country". secondary page.

Select "My destinations". Press Navigation to display the Enter the "City", the "Street" and the primary page. " " and confirm by pressing Number or Select the "Preferred" tab. on the suggestions displayed. Select "My home". Press "OK" to select the "Guidance criteria". Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page. And/Or Or Select "See on map" to select the Select "My destinations". Select "My work". "Guidance criteria".

Select the "Recent" tab. Or Press "OK" to start navigation. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a preset favourite destination. the "Guidance criteria". . 11 CITROËN Connect Nav Towards a contact Select "Points of interest". Press this button to start navigation.

Press Navigation to display the Or primary page. Select the "Travel", or "Leisure" or "Commercial" or "Public" or Press this button to save the or "Geographic" tab. address displayed.

Or Press the "MENU" button to go to the Select "Search" to enter the name A long press on an item opens a list of secondary page. and address of a POI. POIs nearby. Select "My destinations". Press "OK" to start calculation of the route. Towards GPS coordinates Select the "Contact" tab. Press Navigation to display the Select a contact in the list to start navigation. To a point on the map primary page. or Press Navigation to display the primary page. Towards points of interest or Explore the map by sliding a finger on the (POI) screen. Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Press this button to display the world categories. screen. map. Using the grid, select by zoom the Select the destination by pressing on the map. Press Navigation to display the desired country or region. primary page. or Tap the screen to place a marker Press this button to enter the GPS and display the sub-menu. coordinates.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page. 12 CITROËN Connect Nav A marker is displayed in the middle TMC (Traffic Message Network connection provided by of the screen, with the "Latitude" the user and "Longitude" coordinates. Channel)

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages are linked to a European Press this button to start navigation. standard on the broadcasting of traffic information via the RDS system on FM radio, transmitting traffic information in Connected navigation Or real time. connection The TMC information is then displayed Press this button to save the on a GPS Navigation system map and address displayed. As a safety measure and because it taken into account straight away during requires sustained attention by the driver, navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic using a smartphone when driving is OR jams and closed roads. prohibited. Press this button to enter the value All operations must be done with the for "Latitude" using the virtual vehicle stationary. keypad. The display of danger zones depends on the legislation in force and subscription to And the service. For access to connected navigation, you Press this button to enter the value can use the connection provided by the for "Longitude" using the virtual vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance keypad. call" services or use your smartphone as Connected navigation a modem. Depending on version Activate and enter settings for sharing Depending on the equipment level of the the smartphone connection. vehicle Network connection provided by the vehicle

OR . 13 CITROËN Connect Nav

Network connection provided by Restrictions of use: The processes and standards the vehicle - With CarPlay®, connection sharing is are constantly changing; for the The system is automatically only with a Wi-Fi connection. communication process between the TM connected to the modem included - With MirrorLink , connection sharing smartphone and the system to work for the "Emergency or assistance is only with a USB connection. correctly, we recommend that you calls" services and does not require The quality of services depends on the update the operating system of the a connection provided by the user quality of the network connection. smartphone as well as the date and via their smartphone. time of the smartphone and the system.

Network connection provided by With the arrival of "TOMTOM the user TRAFFIC", the services are Settings specific to available. connected navigation USB connection

Connect a USB cable. In the "Settings" menu you can create The smartphone charges when The services offered with connected a profile for just one person or a group connected by a USB cable. navigation are as follows. of people with common points, with the A Connected Services pack: possibility of entering a multitude of - Weather, settings (radio presets, audio settings, Bluetooth connection - Filling stations, navigation history, contact favourites, Activate the Bluetooth function on - Car park, etc.); these settings are taken into account the telephone and ensure that it is - Traffic, automatically. visible to all (see the "Applications" - POI local search. section). A Danger zone pack (option).

Wi-Fi connection Press Navigation to display the primary page. Select a Wi-Fi network found by the or system and connect to it (see the "Applications" section).

Press the "MENU" button to go to the secondary page.

14 CITROËN Connect Nav

Select "Settings". The display of danger zones depends on "Danger zones" pack the legislation in force and subscription to updates the service. Press Settings to display the Select " ". Map primary page.

Activate or deactivate: Declaration of "Danger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the - "Allow declaration of danger " secondary page. zones". zones - "Guidance to final destination To distribute information on the Select "System settings". on foot" declaration of danger zones, you should - "Authorise sending check the option: " information" Allow declaration of These settings must be made danger zones". Select the "System info" tab. according to each profile. Press Navigation to display the Select "View" to display the versions primary page. Select "Alerts". of the different modules installed in or Activate or deactivate "Warn of the system. danger zones". Select "Update(s) due". Press the " Select this button. Declare a new danger zone" button located in the upper bar of the touch screen

Activate: Give an audible warning You can download the system and map updates from the Brand's website. Select the option "Type" to choose the type of "danger zone". The update procedure can also be found on the website. For access to connected navigation, you have to select the option: "Authorise Select the "Speed" option and enter sending information". it using the virtual keypad.

Press "OK" to save and distribute the information. . 15 CITROËN Connect Nav Displaying the weather Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay®, Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Press Navigation to display the Internet Browser primary page. or Press Applications to display the primary page. Applications or Press Applications to display the Press this button to display the list of primary page. services. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet or Browser" function.

Select "View map". Press "Internet Browser" to display the Press "Applications" to display the browser home page. applications home page.

Select your country of residence. Select "Weather". CarPlay® smartphone Press "OK" to save and start the connection browser. Press this button to display primary As a safety measure and because it information. requires sustained attention by the driver, Connection to the internet is via one of using a smartphone when driving is the network connections provided by the prohibited. Press this button to display the vehicle or the user. All operations must be done with the detailed weather information. vehicle stationary. Connectivity

The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will Press Applications to display the be the maximum temperature for the day. primary page. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will or be the minimum temperature for the night.

16 CITROËN Connect Nav

From the system, press The synchronisation of a personal The synchronisation of a personal "Applications" to display the smartphone allows users to display smartphone allows users to display or primary page. applications compatible with the applications adapted for the smartphone's smartphone's CarPlay® technology on the MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle vehicle screen when the smartphone's screen. Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay® CarPlay® function has been previously The processes and standards function. activated. are constantly changing. For the As the processes and standards are Press "CarPlay" to display the communication process between the constantly changing, it is recommended CarPlay® interface. smartphone and the system to operate, that you keep your smartphone's it is essential that the smartphone be operating system updated. unlocked; update the operating system For the list of eligible smartphones, go of the smartphone as well as the date to the Brand's internet website in your On connecting the USB cable, the and time of the smartphone and the country. CarPlay® function deactivates the system. system's Bluetooth® mode. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the Brand's internet website in your Connect a USB cable. The country. smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection As a safety measure, applications can Press on "Telephone" to display the only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; CarPlay® interface. display is interrupted once the vehicle is or As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, moving. using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Or All operations must be done with the The MirrorLinkTM function requires the Connect a USB cable. The vehicle stationary. use of a compatible smartphone and smartphone charges when applications. connected by a USB cable. When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone. . 17 CITROËN Connect Nav

Connect a USB cable. The There may be a wait for the availability of As a safety measure, applications can smartphone charges when applications, depending on the quality of only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; connected by a USB cable. your network. display is interrupted once the vehicle is From the system, press moving. "Applications" to display the or primary page. Android Auto smartphone connection The "Android Auto" function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM As a safety measure and because it applications. function. requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is Connect a USB cable. The Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the prohibited. smartphone charges when application in the system. All operations must be done with the connected by a USB cable. vehicle stationary. Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press TM "Applications" to display the necessary to activate the MirrorLink Synchronising a personal smartphone function. or primary page. In the process, several screen allows users to display applications pages relating to certain functions adapted for the smartphone's Android Auto technology on the vehicle screen. are displayed. Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android The processes and standards Accept to start and complete the Auto" function. connection. are constantly changing. For the communication process between the Press "Android Auto" to start the Once connection is established, a page smartphone and the system to operate, application in the system. is displayed with the applications already it is essential that the smartphone be downloaded to your smartphone and adapted unlocked; update the operating system to MirrorLinkTM technology. of the smartphone as well as the date During the procedure, several and time of the smartphone and the screen pages relating to certain Access to the different audio sources remains system. functions are displayed. accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM For the list of eligible smartphones, go Accept to start and complete the display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. to the Brand's internet website in your connection. Access to the menus for the system is possible country. at any time using the dedicated buttons.

18 CITROËN Connect Nav

Different audio sources remain accessible in Select "Search". Activate the Bluetooth function on the the margin of the Android Auto display, using The list of telephones detected is telephone and ensure that it is "visible to touch buttons in the upper bar. displayed. all" (telephone configuration). Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended Procedure from the telephone that you deactivate and then reactivate the Select the system name in the list of Bluetooth function in your telephone. devices detected. In Android Auto mode, the function to display the menus by pressing the screen Select the name of the chosen briefly with three fingers is deactivated. In the system, accept the connection request telephone in the list. from the telephone.

Depending on the type of telephone, you To complete the pairing, whichever may be asked to accept or not the transfer There may be a wait for the availability of procedure is used (from the telephone or of your contacts and messages. applications, depending on the quality of from the system), ensure that the code your network. is the same in the system and in the telephone. Connection sharing Bluetooth connection® The system offers to connect the telephone Procedure from the system with 3 profiles: - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone As a safety measure and because they Press Applications to display the only), require prolonged attention on the part primary page. - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of of the driver, the operations for pairing or of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the audio files on the telephone), the Bluetooth hands-free system of your - "Mobile internet data". audio system must be carried out with the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. secondary page.

Press "Bluetooth connection". . 19 CITROËN Connect Nav

Select the "Secured" or "Not Select the "Activation" tab to activate or The "Mobile internet data" profile secured" or "Stored" tab. deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection. must be activated for connected navigation (where the vehicle does not And/Or Select a network. have "Emergency and assistance call" Select the "Settings" tab to change the name services), having first activated sharing of of the system network and the password. this connection on your smartphone. Using the virtual keypad, enter the Press "OK" to confirm. "Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the "Password". Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to start the connection. To protect against unauthorised access and make your systems as secure as Press "OK" to confirm. possible, the use of a complex security code or password is recommended. The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive. Wi-Fi connection Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi. Managing connections Wi-Fi connection sharing Press Applications to display the Press Applications to display the Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the primary page. primary page. system. or or Press Applications to display the primary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the or secondary page. secondary page. Select "Manage connection". Select "Wi-Fi network Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the connection". secondary page. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". With this function you can view the access to connected services, the availability of connected services and modify the connection mode. 20 CITROËN Connect Nav

Enter the values using the virtual Make a long press on one of the Radio keypad. buttons to preset the station. Selecting a station First enter the units then click on the decimals zone to enter the figures Press Radio Media to display the after the decimal point. primary page. Activating/Deactivating RDS or Press "OK" to confirm. Press Radio Media to display the primary page. or Press "Frequency". Radio reception may be affected by the Press one of the buttons for an use of electrical equipment not approved automatic search for radio stations. by the Brand, such as a USB charger Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the connected to the 12 V socket. secondary page. The external environment (hills, buildings, Or tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Select "Radio settings". Move the cursor for a manual search block reception, including in RDS mode. for frequencies up or down. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and Select "General". does not indicate any failure of the audio Activate/Deactivate "Station Or equipment. follow". Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press "OK" to confirm. or Presetting a station RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Select a radio station or frequency. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the listening to the same station by automatic (refer to the corresponding section) secondary page. retuning to alternative frequencies. However, Press "Presets". in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS Select "Radio stations" in the station may not be assured throughout the secondary page. entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss Press "Frequency". of reception of the station during a journey. . 21 CITROËN Connect Nav Displaying text information Playing TA messages Press Radio Media to display the primary page.

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function or The "Radio Text" function allows gives priority to TA alert messages. information transmitted by the radio To operate, this function needs good station and related to the station or the reception of a radio station that carries Select the audio source. song playing to be displayed. this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast, the current media is automatically interrupted so that Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband. Press Radio Media to display the the TA message can be heard. Normal primary page. play of the media previously playing is or resumed at the end of the message. DAB-FM auto tracking

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select "Announcements". "DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. secondary page. When the digital radio signal is poor, Activate/Deactivate "Traffic "DAB-FM tracking" allows you to announcement". Select "Radio settings". continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the Press "OK" to confirm. corresponding FM analogue station (if there is one). Select "General".

Activate/Deactivate "Display radio DAB (Digital Audio text". Broadcasting) radio Press Radio Media to display the primary page. Press "OK" to confirm. Terrestrial Digital Radio or Digital radio provides higher quality reception. The different "multiplex/ensemble" Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the services offer a choice of radio stations secondary page. arranged in alphabetical order.

22 CITROËN Connect Nav Select "Radio settings". Media Auxiliary socket (AUX) USB port (depending on model/depending on equipment) Select "General". Activate/Deactivate "Station follow".

Press "OK".

This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" If "DAB-FM tracking" is activated, there Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings. is a difference of a few seconds when the connect the USB device to the USB port using system switches to FM analogue radio a suitable cable (not supplied). with sometimes a variation in volume. Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.) Once the digital signal quality is restored, to the Jack socket using an audio cable (not the system automatically changes back To protect the system, do not use a USB supplied). to "DAB". hub. First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. The system builds playlists (in temporary Operation of controls is via the portable device. memory), an operation which can take from If the "DAB" station being listened to is a few seconds to several minutes at the first not available on FM ("DAB-FM" option connection. greyed out), or "DAB-FM tracking" is not Reduce the number of non-music files and the CD player activated, the sound will cut out while the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. digital signal is too weak. The playlists are updated every time the (depending on model/depending on equipment) ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The lists are memorised: if they Insert the CD in the player. are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter. . 23 CITROËN Connect Nav Selecting the source Connecting Apple® players Information and advice Press Radio Media to display the Connect the Apple® player to the USB port The system supports USB mass storage primary page. using a suitable cable (not supplied). devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® Play starts automatically. or players via USB ports. The adapter cable is not supplied. Control is via the audio system. Device management is done by the audio Select "Source". system controls. Other devices, not recognised on The classifications available are those of connection, must be connected to the Choose the source. the portable device connected (artists/ auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not albums/genres/playlists/audiobooks/ supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, ® podcasts). depending on compatibility. Bluetooth audio streaming The default classification used is by Streaming allows you to listen to music from artists. To modify the classification used, your smartphone. return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first for example) and confirm to go down adjust the volume on your portable device (to through the menu to the desired track. To protect the system, do not use a USB a high level). hub. Then adjust the volume of your audio system. If play does not start automatically, it may be The audio equipment will only play audio files necessary to start the audio playback from the with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" telephone. The version of software in the audio system file extensions and with a bit rate of between Control is from the portable device or by using may not be compatible with the generation of 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. the system's touch buttons. your Apple® player. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma Once connected in streaming mode, the 9 standard. telephone is considered to be a media The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and source. 48 kHz.

24 CITROËN Connect Nav

It is advisable to restrict file names to Procedure from the system 20 characters, without using special characters Telephone Press Telephone to display the (e.g. " " ?.; ù) so as to avoid any reading or Pairing a Bluetooth® display problems. primary page. telephone or Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format (File Allocation Table). As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the Press "Bluetooth search". driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile It is recommended that the original USB telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free cable for the portable device be used. system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the Or In order to be able to play a burned CDR or ignition on. Select "Search". CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or The list of telephones detected is Joliet if possible when burning the CD. displayed. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not be played correctly. Activate the Bluetooth function on the It is recommended that the same burning telephone and ensure that it is "visible to If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended standard is always used on an individual disc, all" (telephone configuration). that you deactivate and then reactivate the with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) Bluetooth function in your telephone. for the best acoustic quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Procedure from the telephone Select the name of the chosen Joliet standard is recommended. Select the system name in the list of telephone in the list. devices detected.

In the system, accept the connection request Connection sharing from the telephone. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: To complete the pairing, whichever - "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone procedure is used (from the telephone or only), from the system), ensure that the code - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of is the same in the system and in the the audio files on the telephone), telephone. - "Mobile internet data". . 25 CITROËN Connect Nav

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Go to the Brand's website for more information Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet secondary page. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). data" is obligatory for connected navigation having first activated sharing of Select "Bluetooth connection" to this connection on your smartphone. display the list of paired devices. Managing paired telephones

Press the "details" button. Select one or more profiles. This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing. Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Press Telephone to display the Depending on the type of telephone, you Press "OK" to confirm. primary page. may be asked to accept or not the transfer or of your contacts and messages. The ability of the system to connect to just Automatic reconnection one profile depends on the telephone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the All three profiles may connect by default. secondary page.

On return to the vehicle, if the last Select "Bluetooth connection" to telephone connected is present again, it is display the list of paired devices. automatically recognised and within about The services available depend on 30 seconds of switching on the ignition, the network, the SIM card and the the connection is established without any compatibility of the Bluetooth devices Press on the name of the telephone action on your part (Bluetooth activated). used. Check the instructions for your chosen in the list to disconnect it. telephone and with your service provider Press again to connect it. for the services to which you have access. To modify the connection profile: Press Telephone to display the The profiles compatible with the system primary page. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, or MAP and PAN.

26 CITROËN Connect Nav

Deleting a telephone Making a call Or make a long press Select the basket at top right of the Using the telephone is not recommended screen to display a basket alongside while driving. the telephone chosen. on the steering mounted PHONE Park the vehicle. button. Make the call using the steering mounted controls. Press the basket alongside the Select "Contact". telephone chosen to delete it. Calling a new number Select the desired contact from the list offered. Receiving a call Select "Call". Press Telephone to display the An incoming call is announced by a ring and primary page. a superimposed display in the screen. or Make a short press on the steering Calling a recently used mounted PHONE button to accept number Enter the phone number using the an incoming call. Press Telephone to display the digital keypad. primary page. And or Make a long press Press "Call" to start the call.

Or on the steering mounted PHONE Make a long press button to reject the call. Calling a contact Press Telephone to display the Or primary page. on the steering mounted button. Select "End call". or

Select "Calls". Select the desired contact from the list offered. . 27 CITROËN Connect Nav

It is always possible to make a call directly Managing messages Access to "Messages" depends on the from the telephone; as a safety measure, compatibility of the smartphone and the Press Telephone to display the first park the vehicle. integral system. primary page. Depending on the smartphone, access to or your messages or email may be slow.

Press the " " button to go to the OPTIONS The services available depend on Managing contacts/entries secondary page. the network, the SIM card and the Press Telephone to display the Select "Messages" to display the list compatibility of the Bluetooth devices primary page. of messages. used. Check in the manual for your smartphone or and with your service provider for the Select the "All" or "Sent" or services available to you. "Incoming" tab. Select "Contact".

Select "Create" to add a new Select the detail of the message contact. chosen in one of the lists. Managing quick messages

In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone Press Telephone to display the Press "Answer" to send a quick numbers for the contact. primary page. message stored in the system. In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for or the contact. Press "Call" to start the call. In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the for the contact. secondary page.

Press " Play" to hear the message. Select "Quick messages" to display The "Email" function allows email the list of messages. addresses to be entered for a contact, but the system is not able to send emails.

28 CITROËN Connect Nav

Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival" Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or Or or "Not available" or "Other" tab "Not read" tab. "Voice". with the possibility of creating new messages. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Or "Ringtone". Press "Create" to write a new message. Press " Play" to start playing the Press "OK" to save the settings. message.

Select the message chosen in one The balance/distribution (or spatialisation of the lists. Access to "Email" depends on the with the Arkamys© system) is audio compatibility of the smartphone and the processing that allows the quality of the integral system. sound to be adapted according to the Press "Transfer" to select the number of passengers in the vehicle. addressee(s). Available only with the front and rear Settings speakers configuration.

Press " Play" to start playing the Audio settings message. The Ambience (6 optional ambiences) Press to display the Settings and Bass, Medium and Treble audio primary page. settings are different and independent for or each audio source. Managing email Activate or deactivate "Loudness". Press Telephone to display the The settings for "Position" (All Select "Audio settings". primary page. passengers, Driver and Front only) are common to all sources. or Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", Select "Ambience". "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary input". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Or secondary page. "Position". Onboard audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging Select "Email" to display the list of Or optimises the balance/distribution of messages. "Sound". sound in the passenger compartment. . 29 CITROËN Connect Nav Profile settings Insert a USB memory stick containing Or the photograph in the USB port. "Sound". Select the photograph. As a safety measure and because it Or requires the sustained attention of the Press "OK" to accept the transfer of "Voice". driver, changes to settings must only be the photograph. done with the vehicle stationary. Or Press "OK" again to save the " ". settings. Ringtone Press Settings to display the primary page. Press "OK" to save the settings. or The location for the photograph is square; the system reshapes the original photograph if in another format. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Modifying system settings secondary page. Press this button to initialise the Press Settings to display the Select "Setting of the profiles". profile selected. primary page. or Initialisation of the profile selected Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" activates the English language by default. or "Common profile". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page. Press this button to enter a name for Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the the profile using the virtual keypad. "Audio settings" with it. Select "Screen configuration".

Select "Audio settings". Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Animation".

Press this button to add Select "Ambience". Activate or deactivate: "Automatic a photograph to the profile. scrolling". Or Select "Brightness". "Balance".

30 CITROËN Connect Nav Move the cursor to adjust the Select the language Press "OK" to confirm. brightness of the screen and/or of the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the Select the display format of the date. primary page. Press Settings to display the or primary page. or Adjustment of the time and date is only Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the available if "GPS synchronisation" is secondary page. deactivated. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The change between winter and summer secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the time is done by changing the time zone. language. Select "System settings".

Setting the date Setting the time Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the fuel consumption and temperature. primary page. primary page. Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial or or settings.

Returning the system to factory settings Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the activates the English language by default. secondary page. secondary page.

Select "Setting the time-date". Select "Setting the time-date".

Select "System info" to display the versions of the different modules installed in the system. Select "Time". Select "Date". Press this button to adjust the time Press on this button to define the using the virtual keypad. date. . 31 CITROËN Connect Nav

Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Colour schemes".

Press this button to define the time zone. Select a colour scheme in the list then press "OK" to confirm. Select the display format for the time (12h/24h).

Activate or deactivate Every time the colour scheme is changed, synchronisation with GPS (UTC). the system restarts, temporarily displaying a black screen.

Press "OK" to confirm. Frequently asked questions The system does not automatically The following information groups together the manage the change between winter and answers to the most frequently asked questions summer time (depending on country). concerning your audio system.

Colour schemes

As a safety measure, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is only possible when the vehicle is stationary.

Press Settings to display the primary page. or

32 CITROËN Connect Nav

Navigation

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with Check the route settings in the "Navigation" the current location (exclusion of toll roads on menu. a toll road).

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The audible warning of "Danger zones" does The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation" not work. is too low. menu and check the voice volume in the audio settings.

The system does not suggest a detour around The guidance criteria do not take account of Select the setting for the "Traffic info" function an incident on the route. TMC messages. in the list of route settings (Without, Manual or Automatic).

I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on When not navigating, the system announces all Zoom in on the map to see the exact position my route. "Danger zones" positioned in a cone located in of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for no longer receive alerts other than navigation "Danger zones" located on nearby or parallel instructions or to reduce the time for the roads. announcement.

Certain traffic jams along the route are not On starting, it is several minutes before the Wait until the traffic information is being indicated in real time. system begins to receive the traffic information. received correctly (display of the traffic information icons on the map).

In certain countries, only major routes This is perfectly normal. The system is (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic dependent on the traffic information available. information. . 33 CITROËN Connect Nav

The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may Wait until the system has started up completely take up to 3 minutes to receive more than so that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites correctly. 4 satellites.

Depending on the geographical environment This behaviour is normal. The system is (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of dependent on the GPS signal reception reception of the GPS signal may vary. conditions.

My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical Check that the connected services are areas, the connection may be unavailable. activated (settings, contract).

Radio

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in etc.). the geographical area.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment. including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a dealer. example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

34 CITROËN Connect Nav

I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not received or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu. The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name.

Media

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick. catalogue time).

The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up. a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot The CD has been recorded in a format that is be played if it is too badly damaged. not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content in the case of a recorded The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system CD: consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section. not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD does not read DVDs. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not be read by the audio system. . 35 CITROËN Connect Nav

There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new media, the system This is perfectly normal. insertion of a CD or connection of a USB reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, memory stick. artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.

The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without unsuitable. selecting an ambience.

Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.

Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically Start playback from the device. launch playback.

Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the displayed on the audio streaming screen. transfer of this information.

36 CITROËN Connect Nav Telephone

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth switched off or the telephone may not be switched on. visible. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your the system. telephone on the Brand's website (services).

The sound of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and Increase the volume of the audio system, to Bluetooth mode is inaudible. the telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).

Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display synchronising the contacts on the SIM card, telephone contacts". the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronisations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

The contacts are not listed in alphabetical Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings. order. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.

The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system. . 37 CITROËN Connect Nav Settings

QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION

When changing the setting of treble and bass, The selection of an ambience setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or ambience the ambience setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice versa. settings to obtain the desired musical When changing the ambience setting, the ambience. treble and bass settings are reset.

When changing the balance setting, The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution distribution is deselected. the balance settings and vice versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. When changing the distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended that sound sources, which can generate audible the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

When the engine is off, the system switches off When the engine is switched off, the system's Start then vehicle's engine to increase the after several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge of charge of the battery. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.

The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting. if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).

38 Alphabetical index A B ABS ...... 103-104 Battery...... 195, 202, 231, 233-234 Central locking...... 40, 42-43 Accessories...... 101 Battery, charging...... 232-233 Changing a bulb...... 220, 223-225 Accessory position...... 131 Battery, remote control...... 45-47 Changing a fuse...... 226-228, 230 Access to the 3rd row...... 65 Black panel...... 11 Changing a wheel...... 211-216 Active Safety Brake...... 21, 165-166, 168 Black screen...... 11 Changing a wiper blade...... 100, 195-196 AdBlue®...... 8, 20, 28, 204-205 Blanking screen (snow shield)...... 193, 197 Changing the remote control battery...... 46-47 Additive, Diesel...... 18, 202 Blind, panoramic sunroof...... 89 Checking the engine oil level...... 27 Adjusting head restraints...... 59-60 Blinds, side...... 79-80, 84 Checking the levels...... 199, 201 Adjusting seats...... 57-59, 62-64 Blind spot detection...... 24, 174 Checking tyre pressures Adjusting the air distribution...... 72, 74-75 BlueHDi...... 28, 204, 236 (using the kit)...... 208-210 Adjusting the air flow...... 72, 74-75 Bluetooth (hands-free)...... 13-14, 25-26 Checks...... 199, 202-204 Adjusting the date...... 39, 18, 31 Bluetooth (telephone)...... 13-15, 25-27 Checks, routine...... 202-204 Adjusting the height and reach of Bonnet...... 198 Child lock...... 124 the steering wheel...... 68 Boot...... 47-48 Children...... 118, 120-121, 123 Adjusting the seat belt height...... 106 Boot (fittings)...... 86 Children (safety)...... 124 Adjusting the temperature...... 72-73, 75 Boot (opening)...... 40 Child seats ...... 108, 112-113, 117-118, 124 Adjusting the time...... 39, 17, 31 Bottle holder...... 79 Child seats, conventional...... 117 Advice on driving...... 126-127 Brake discs...... 203-204 Child seats, ISOFIX...... 119-121, 123 Airbags...... 22-23, 109, 111, 113 Brake lamps...... 223-225 CITROËN Connect Nav...... 1 Airbags, curtain...... 110-111 Brakes...... 13, 203-204 CITROËN Connect Radio...... 1 Airbags, front...... 110-111, 114 Braking, Closing the boot...... 47-48 Airbags, lateral...... 110-111 automatic emergency...... 21, 165-166, 168 Closing the doors...... 40, 42-43 Air conditioning...... 6, 73 Braking, dynamic emergency...... 131-134 Collision Risk Alert...... 165-167 Air conditioning, automatic...... 71, 75-76 Brightness...... 16 Configuration, vehicle...... 31-33, 35-36 Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic...... 74 Bulbs (changing)...... 220, 223-225 Configurations, seats...... 67 Air conditioning, manual...... 71-72 Connection, Bluetooth...... 13-15, 19, 25-27 Air intake...... 72, 75-76 Connection, MirrorLink...... 11-12, 17 Air vents...... 70 Connection, Wi-Fi network...... 20 Alarm...... 53-54 Control, back-up boot release...... 51 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)...... 103-104 Control, back-up door release...... 45-46 Anti-pinch...... 89 Control, heated seats...... 61 Anti-theft/Immobiliser...... 44 C Control stalk, lighting...... 90, 92 Apple CarPlay connection...... 12, 16 Cable, audio...... 9, 23 Control stalk, wipers...... 98-99 Armrest, front...... 62, 79 Cable, Jack...... 9, 23 Courtesy lamps...... 87-88 Anti-slip regulation (ASR)...... 103-104 Cap, fuel filler...... 190 Cruise control...... 144, 146, 148-150, Assistance, Capacity, fuel tank...... 190 157-161, 163, 165 emergency braking...... 103-104, 168 Cartridge, fragrance...... 77-78 Cruise control, adaptive...... 146, 151-154 Assistance call...... 102-103 CD...... 9, 23-24 156-157, 159 Audio streaming (Bluetooth)...... 9, 24 CD, MP3...... 9, 23-24 Cruise control, adaptive with Stop function...... 146, 157-161, 163 . 305 Alphabetical index

Cruise control by speed limit recognition...... 146 Electronic brake force distribution Fuel...... 6, 189 Cup holder...... 79 (EBFD)...... 103-104 Fuel consumption...... 6, 38-39 Electronic stability control (ESC)...... 103-104 Fuel tank...... 191 Emergency braking assistance (EBA). ... 103-104 Fusebox, dashboard...... 226-228, 230 Emergency call...... 102-103 Fusebox, engine compartment...... 226-228, 230 Emergency switching off...... 128, 130 Fuses...... 226-228, 230 Emissions control system, SCR...... 204 Energy economy mode...... 195 D Engine, Diesel...... 22, 189, 199, 236, 240 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Engine, petrol...... 189, 199, 238 – Digital radio...... 8, 22 Engine compartment...... 199 Date (setting)...... 39, 18, 31 Engines...... 237-238, 240 Daytime running lamps...... 93, 220-222 Environment...... 6, 47 G Deactivating the passenger airbag. 110, 113-114 Gauge, fuel...... 190 Deadlocking...... 41-42 Gearbox, automatic...... 134, 136-141, 203 Defrosting...... 77 Gearbox, manual...... 134-135, 140-141, 203 Defrosting, front...... 77 Gear lever...... 6 Demisting...... 77 Gear lever, manual gearbox...... 135 Demisting, front...... 77 F Gear efficiency indicator...... 139 Demisting, rear...... 68 Fatigue detection...... 175 Glove box...... 79-80 Demisting, rear screen...... 68 Filling the AdBlue® tank...... 205 G.P.S...... 12 Dimensions...... 243 Filling the fuel tank...... 189-191 Dipstick...... 27, 199 -200 Filter, air...... 202 Direction indicators...... 92, 220-225 Filter, oil...... 202 Display screen, instrument panel...... 139 Filter, particle...... 201-202 Doors...... 47 Filter, passenger compartment...... 202 Driver's attention warning...... 175 Fitting a wheel...... 217-219 Driving economically...... 6 Fitting roof bars...... 196 H Driving positions (storing)...... 59 Fittings, boot...... 86 Hands-free access...... 51-52 Dynamic stability control (DSC)...... 21, 103-105 Fittings, interior...... 79 Hands-free tailgate...... 50-52 Fittings, rear...... 84 Hazard warning lamps...... 101-102, 208 Flap, fuel filler...... 190-191 Hazard warning lamps, Floor, concertina...... 65-66 automatic operation...... 102 Foglamp, rear...... 24, 223-225 Headlamp adjustment...... 96 Foglamps...... 221 Headlamps, automatic dipping...... 25, 94-96 E Foglamps, front...... 91, 96-97, 220, 222, 225 Headlamps, automatic illumination...... 90, 93 Eco-driving (advice)...... 6 Foglamps, rear...... 91 Headlamps, dipped beam...... 25, 90, 220-221 Economy mode...... 195 Folding the rear seats...... 62-66 Headlamps, directional...... 97, 220 Frequency (radio)...... 21-22 Headlamps, halogen...... 221

306 Alphabetical index K Headlamps, main beam...... 25, 90, 220-222 Key...... 40-42, 44-46 Locking the doors...... 42-44 Headlamps, Xenon...... 220 Key, electronic...... 40-43, 45 Low fuel level...... 190 Headlamp wash...... 100 Keyless Entry and Starting...... 41-43, 45, 129 Lumbar...... 60 Head restraints, front...... 59-60 Key not recognised...... 128, 130 Head restraints, rear...... 63 Key with remote control...... 127 Heating...... 6, 72 Kit, hands-free...... 13-14, 25-26 Hill start assist...... 134-135 Kit, temporary puncture repair...... 208-210 Hooks...... 85 Horn...... 102 M Maintenance, routine...... 6 Map reading lamps...... 88 Markings, identification...... 244 L Massage function ...... 60 Labels, identification...... 244 Mat...... 82-83 I Lamps, parking...... 92 Memorising a speed...... 144 Identification, vehicle...... 244 Lane Departure Warning System Menu...... 12 Ignition...... 131, 28 (LDWS)...... 23, 169, 175 Menus (audio)...... 4-5, 3-5 Ignition on...... 131 LEDs – Light-emitting diodes...... 220 Messages...... 28 Immobiliser, electronic...... 45, 127 Leg rest, electric...... 60 Messages, quick...... 28 Indicator, AdBlue® range...... 28 Level, AdBlue®...... 201 Mirror, child surveillance...... 69 Indicator, coolant temperature...... 27 Level, brake fluid...... 201 Mirror, rear view...... 69 Indicator, engine oil level...... 27 Level, Diesel additive...... 201-202 Mirrors, door...... 68-69, 173-174 Indicators, direction...... 92 Level, engine coolant...... 27, 201 Misfuel prevention...... 191 Inflating tyres...... 203 Level, engine oil...... 27, 199 -200 Modularity, seats...... 67 Inflating tyres (using the kit)...... 208-210 Level, headlamp wash...... 201 Motorised tailgate...... 48-51 Instrument panels...... 8-9 Level, screenwash fluid...... 201 Mountings, ISOFIX...... 119 Intelligent Traction Control...... 104 Levels and checks...... 199, 201 Internet browser...... 16 Light-emitting diodes – LEDs...... 220 ISOFIX...... 120-121 Lighting...... 88 ISOFIX mountings...... 119 Lighting, ambient...... 88 Lighting, directional...... 96-97 Lighting, guide-me home...... 93 Lighting, interior...... 87-88 N Lighting, welcome...... 94 Net ...... 86-87 Loading...... 6 Number plate lamps...... 226 Load reduction mode...... 195 J Locating your vehicle...... 41 Jack...... 211-216, 9, 23 Locking...... 44-45 Jump starting...... 231 Locking from the inside...... 43-44 . 307 Alphabetical index O R Obstacle detection...... 176 Radio...... 6, 9, 21, 24 Scented air freshener...... 77-78 Oil, engine...... 199-200 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Screen, cold climate...... 197 Oil change...... 199-200 Broadcasting – DAB)...... 8, 22 Screen menu map...... 12 Oil consumption...... 199-200 Range...... 38-39 Screenwash, front...... 100 Opening the bonnet...... 198 Range, AdBlue...... 28-29 Screenwash, rear...... 99 Opening the boot...... 40-41, 47-48 RDS...... 7, 21-22 Seat belts...... 15, 106-108, 117 Opening the doors...... 41, 47 Reading lamps, rear...... 84 Seats, electric...... 58-59 Opening the panoramic sunroof blind...... 89 Rear screen, demisting...... 77 Seats, front...... 57-59 Recharging the battery...... 232-233 Seats, heated...... 61 Recirculation, air...... 72, 75-76 Seats, rear...... 62-66 Reduction of electrical load...... 195 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)...... 204 Regeneration of the particle filter...... 202 Selector, gear...... 136-139 Reinitialisation of the under- Serial number, vehicle...... 244 inflation detection system...... 143 Service (warning lamp)...... 17 P Reinitialising the remote control...... 46-47 Service indicator...... 26 Pads, brake...... 203-204 Remote control...... 40-45 Servicing...... 26 Paint colour code...... 244 Removing a wheel...... 217-219 Settings, equipment...... 31-33, 35-36 Panoramic glass roof...... 89 Removing the mat...... 82-83 Settings, system...... 16, 30 Parcel shelf, rear...... 84-85 Replacing bulbs...... 220, 223-225 Sidelamps...... 90, 92, 220-225 Park Assist...... 181-182, 185 Replacing fuses...... 226-228, 230 Side repeater...... 222 Parking brake...... 203-204 Replacing the air filter...... 202 Snow chains...... 191-192 Parking brake, electric...... 14-17, 21, 131-134 Replacing the oil filter...... 202 Socket, 12 V accessory...... 79, 81, 85 Parking sensors, audible and visual...... 176 Replacing the passenger Socket, 230 V...... 81 Parking sensors, front...... 177 compartment filter...... 202 Socket, auxiliary...... 9, 23 Parking sensors, rear...... 177 Resetting the service indicator...... 26-27 Socket, Jack...... 82, 9, 23 Plates, identification...... 244 Resetting the trip recorder...... 30-31 Sockets, audio...... 82 Player, Apple®...... 10, 24 Reversing camera...... 178 Speed limiter...... 144, 146-148 Player, MP3 CD...... 23 Reversing lamp...... 223-225 Speed limit recognition...... 144-145 Player, USB...... 9, 23 Roof bars...... 196 Spotlamps, door mirror...... 94 Port, USB...... 82, 9, 23 Running out of fuel (Diesel)...... 236 Starting a Diesel engine...... 189 Pre-heater, Diesel...... 22 Starting the vehicle...... 14-17, 21, 126-130 Pressures, tyres...... 203, 211, 219, 244 Starting using another battery...... 130, 231 Pre-tensioning seat belts...... 108 Station, radio...... 6, 21-22 Priming the fuel system...... 236 Stay, bonnet...... 198 Profiles...... 16, 30 Steering mounted controls, audio...... 3, 3 Protecting children...... 110, 112-114, 118, Steering wheel, adjustment...... 68 120-121, 123-124 S STOP (warning lamp)...... 13 Puncture...... 208-214 Safety, children...... 110, 112-114, 118, Stopping the vehicle...... 14-17, 21, 126-130 120-121, 123-124 Stop & Start...... 23-24, 39, 71, 77, Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)...... 202 140-141, 190, 198, 202, 234 308 Alphabetical index U Storage...... 80 Under-inflation (detection)...... 142 Wipers...... 25, 98-99 Storage boxes...... 83-84 Unlocking...... 40-41 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive...... 98-99 Storing driving positions...... 59 Unlocking, selective...... 42 Sun visor...... 79-80 Unlocking from the inside...... 43-44 Sun visor flap...... 79-80 Unlocking the boot...... 40 Synchronising the remote control...... 46-47 Unlocking the doors...... 43-44 Updating the date...... 39, 18, 31 Updating the time...... 39, 17, 31 USB...... 9, 23-24 T Tables of engines...... 238, 240 Tables of fuses...... 226-228, 230 Tailgate...... 47-50 V Tank, fuel...... 190-191 Ventilation...... 6, 70-71 Technical data...... 238, 240 Visibility...... 77 Telephone...... 13-16, 25-29 Vision 360...... 179-181 Temperature, coolant...... 14, 27 Voice commands...... 5-10 Three flashes (direction indicators)...... 92 Time (setting)...... 39, 17, 31 TMC (Traffic info)...... 13 Tools...... 211-216 Total distance recorder...... 30-31 Touch screen...... 31-33, 35-36, 1, 1 Towing device...... 127, 192 W Towed loads...... 237 Warning and indicator lamps...... 11-12 Towing another vehicle...... 234-235 Warning lamp, airbag...... 22-23 Traction control (ASR)...... 21, 103-105 Warning lamp, braking system...... 13 Traffic information (TMC)...... 13 Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater...... 22 Trailer...... 127, 192 Warning lamp, low fuel level...... 23 Triangle, warning...... 208 Warning lamp, parking brake...... 14 Trip computer...... 36-39 Warning lamp, Service...... 17 Trip distance recorder...... 30-31 Warning lamp, STOP...... 13 Tyres...... 6, 203, 244 Weights...... 237 Tyre under-inflation Wheel, spare...... 203, 211-216, 244 detection...... 22, 142-143, 211 Window controls...... 55 Wiper, rear...... 99 Wiper blades (changing)...... 100, 195-196 . 309

CONDUENT 4Dconcept Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application Xerox of the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.

Printed in the EU Anglais

03-18 *18B78.0040* ANG. 18B78.0040